JP6726920B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that is provided with a display for displaying symbols in a variable manner and performs a lottery based on a gaming ball winning a starting winning opening. In the pachinko machine, the symbols are variably displayed on the display based on the lottery result, and the symbols are stopped and displayed on the display after a lapse of a predetermined period, and when the symbols stopped and displayed on this display have a specific display mode, a big hit. A large number of prize balls are given to the player by executing a game and executing a round game for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening a plurality of times, and paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls enter the special winning opening. Is possible. In this type of gaming machine, the gaming information such as whether or not to execute the high probability control for improving the lottery probability after the big hit game and the number of times the round game is executed are output to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko machine. , There is one that enables management of sales data on the side of a game store based on the output game information, and can display the game information on a data display installed outside the pachinko machine (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP, 2014-54334, A

Although the above-mentioned gaming machine enhances the expectation for the big hit game by performing the effect that expects the big hit game to be executed, there is still room for devising the effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine having a devised effect .

In order to solve the above-mentioned object, a gaming machine of the present invention has a display means for displaying an effect, an acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied, and a start condition of the start information acquired by the acquisition means. When the winning lottery is performed by the starting lottery means and the starting lottery means and the winning lottery result is obtained, a special display result is derived to the display means. On the other hand, display control means for deriving and displaying a non-special display result on the display means when the winning lottery is carried out by the start-time lottery means and the result is a lottery result, and the start acquired by the acquisition means Before the start-time lottery means performs the winning lottery based on the storage means for storing the start-up information in which the start condition is not satisfied, and the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means when the start-up condition is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the start information belongs to a value determined as the winning lottery result by the start-time lottery means, and in which variation mode of a plurality of variation modes the display control is performed. Pre-determination means, it is determined that the pre-determination means does not belong to the value determined as the winning lottery result, and the variation mode is determined as a normal defeat mode without a reach mode The winning determined that the starting information newly acquired by the acquiring unit in the state where only the starting information is stored in the storage unit belongs to the value determined as the winning lottery result by the pre-determination unit. In a state in which the start information is stored, a specific notice effect is executed by the notice executing means, and a period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed according to the number of stored pieces of the start information stored in the storage means is displayed. It is possible to shorten, and in the specific notice effect, the first specific notice executed when the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed is shortened according to the stored number of the start information. There is an effect and a second specific notice effect executed when the period is not shortened, and some of the effect modes of the first specified notice effect and the second specified notice effect are common . At the same time, a performance mode that is not displayed in the second specified notice effect is displayed in the first specified notice effect, and is executed when the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed is shortened. The second specified notice effect is displayed at the time when the first specified notice effect, which is common to a part of the second specified notice effect, is displayed. Than the time shown rather short also, wherein the starting information part of the representation embodiment is an opportunity to execute the first specific informational display and the second specific prediction effect is common is by the pre-determination means Expectation effect that makes the variation of the symbols determined to belong to the value determined to be the winning lottery result have an expectation, the first specific notice effect and the first part of which the some effect modes are common 2 When the special notice effect is displayed at a location different from that of the display means, and when there is a plurality of starting openings that cause acquisition of the starting information, when a specific starting opening is won A gaming machine characterized by enabling execution of the first specified notice effect and the second specified notice effect in which the part of the effect modes are common.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a devised production .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. .. FIG. 7A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the lock member in an outer frame. 1A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened together with a door frame with respect to an outer frame in FIG. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a dish unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|operation production unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the installation base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the production|operation operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the production|operation operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from the rear. It is a DD sectional view in the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 42(b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right production unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a lower door right rotating body of the lower door right effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of a lower door right rotating body facing rearward. (A) is a perspective view from the front of the dish unit with the upper bowl ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is from the rear with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower dish ball removal unit of a dish unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower dish ball removal unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece in a dispensing apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the delivery blade in a delivery apparatus. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in a payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where a taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening/closing door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the front view which cut the front component in the game board and the front unit in the center of the front and back direction inside the game territory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit in the front unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of a side unit bottom and a side unit in a front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit bottom and the side unit seen from a rear side. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of a front unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right side in a center accessory by a cross section. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower back movable production unit of the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back lower rear movable production unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back lower back movable production unit for every main composition, and was seen from the front, (b) is disassembled the main back rear movable production unit for every main composition, and afterwards It is the exploded perspective view seen. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rotary drive unit of the back underside movable production|generation unit, and was seen from the front with the backside underside first decorative body and the backside underside second decorative body. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and seen from behind together with the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-bottom rear second decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back lower back movable production unit from the front. (A) is a front view of the back lower back movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a normal state and a back lower back first decorative body and a back lower back second decorative body are rotated together and it is a back side. It is a front view of the state where the 2nd decorative surface of the lower back 2nd decorative body was turned to the front, and (c) is the state of (b), and is a front side of the backside lower back 2nd decorative body It is a front view of the state where it was moved to the moving end on the left side of the view. In the state of FIG. 104(c), (d) rotates the back-under-back first decorative body and the back-under-back second decorative body together so that the first decorative surface of the back-under-back first decorative body faces the front. It is a front view of a state, and (e) is a state of (d), and after rotating the back decoration, the first decorative body is rotated to open the back decoration first decorative body and the back decoration second decorative body to open the back decoration. It is a front view of the state where the 2nd decorative surface of the 1st decorative body and the 2nd decorative surface of the 2nd decorative body under the back were turned to the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper left movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper left movable production unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the back upper left first ornament and the back upper left second ornament in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view shown in the state where it moved to the position of the right end, and (c) is a front view shown in the state where the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body were developed from the state of (b). Is. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the back left movable production unit from the back. (A) is a front view showing a back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in a projected state. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back inside middle movable production unit of the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back inside medium movable production unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main structure and seen from the front, and (b) is disassembled the rear upper middle movable effect unit for each main structure and from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper middle decorative body unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper middle decorative body unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back upper middle decoration body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of a back upper middle decoration body unit from the front, (b) is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the GG line in (a). (A) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, (b) shows a state in which a pair of back upper middle decorative body units of the back upper middle decorative body unit are half open outward. It is a front view, and (c) is a front view which shows a pair of back upper middle decoration body of a back upper middle decoration body unit in the state fully opened to the outside. (A) is a perspective view of the back-and-middle drive unit of the back-and-middle movable effect unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-and-middle drive unit of the back-and-middle movable effect unit seen from the back. is there. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main structure and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit for each main structure and seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back middle drive unit of the back middle drive unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is a back middle drive unit of the back middle drive unit disassembled from the rear It is the exploded perspective view seen. It is the explanation drawing which shows the drive system of the back inside medium production unit from outline front. (A) is a front view of a back inside moving effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state in which a back inside moving body unit is lowered in the back inside moving effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production unit of the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back lower front movable production unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable back front movable effect unit, which is disassembled except for the front lower back decorative body unit and is seen from the front. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the back under front movable effect unit except for the under back front decorative body unit, which is seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front lower back decoration body unit of the back lower front movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable production unit, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising/lowering mechanism in a back lower front movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the state of the decoration body unit raising/lowering mechanism at the time of raising the back lower front decoration body unit, (b) expands and shows the site|part of the unit raising/lowering pin in (a). It is explanatory drawing, (c) is an explanatory view which expands (b) further and shows the relationship between a unit raising/lowering pin and a slit for raising/lowering. (A) It is a front view which shows a back lower front movable production unit in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front decorative body unit from the state of (a), (c) FIG. 8B is a front view showing a state in which the front lower back decorative body of the front lower back decorative body unit is lifted from the state of FIG. In the game board shown in a state in which the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-bottom rear second decorative body are rotated together in the normal position together in the rear-rear movable production unit of the rear unit, with the second decorative surface facing forward. It is a front view. After the back unit of the back unit, the game area in which the first decorative body of the rear decorative body and the second decorative body of the rear decorative body are closed and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body of the rear decorative body is directed to the front A state in which the back top left first decorative body and the back top left second decorative body of the back top left movable effect unit are slid to the center in the left and right direction within the game area while being slid to the center in the left and right direction inside It is a front view of the game board shown by. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the second back decorative surface of the movable effect unit is opened by rotating the back first rear decorative object of the back directing second front decorative surface and the second decorative surface of the rear rear lower decorative object in front. In addition, the hinge is rotated to open the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable effect unit to open the back upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the back upper left second decorative body second decorative member. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of facing the front. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the second back decorative surface of the movable effect unit is opened by rotating the back first rear decorative object of the back directing second front decorative surface and the second decorative surface of the rear rear lower decorative object in front. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end in front view. In the rear unit, the back upper middle decorative body unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit is moved to the lower end position, and the front upper middle decorative body unit extends in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front so as to extend diagonally downward to the left in front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in a rotated state. FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first upper and lower first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to the position of the half-opened intermediate open state. FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the pair of upper back first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to the fully opened position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back lower front decorative body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back lower front first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 140 and raised above the back lower front second decorative body. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) shows an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the special design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production pre-determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the production pre-determination process, and (B) is a table for details of the types of pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for big hits, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, (C) is a lottery processing for types of big hits It is a symbol determination table used for. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the 1st special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms steady-state processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the notice judgment processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production control processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about fluctuation production start processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the fluctuating effect end processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is the table which shows one example of the production contents of specified announcement production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the production of the Harensho chance production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the production of the Harensho chance production. It is a table which shows an example of the information output from an external terminal board.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game store, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated from each other and extend in the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in a front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to a left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 attached through the plate unit 200 to the lower right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area, and a dish unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area. The foul cover unit 520 for discharging to the lower tray 202, the ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 for feeding the game balls of the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 560 to close the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a front side left surface of the body frame base 600, and a body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 mounted on the right side surface of the main frame base when viewed from the front. , And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 as viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. The character-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side in front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game ball which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 142) stored in the payout control board box 950. Based on the payout device 830 for paying out one by one, and guiding the game balls, which are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, and paid out by the payout device 830, and store the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Depending on, the upper full tank ball route unit 850 which discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port, and the normal discharge port of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 Guide the discharged game ball forward and guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and guide the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port forward to the front end of the door frame 3 A lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a full tank guide path for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of the game balls are housed. And a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, and places the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, a flat-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a table unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning openings attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving the game balls hit in the game area 5a. ) And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board box 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the game is played by the ball launching device 680 with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are accepted in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning holes. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member of the outer frame seen from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game store is installed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends horizontally, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front frame left end side of the upper frame member 10, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be openable and closable.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain A plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inner side (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 has engaging notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction between the position rearward from the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported on an island facility such as a game shop, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size through which a game ball can pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically with a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, The standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to be directed rearward.

The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled in the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to enhance strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, a flat plate shape that extends horizontally and has a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape that extends forward from the front end of the top fixing part 61. Of the front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extending portion 62 toward the center of the front extending portion 62, and vertically penetrating the upper fixing portion 61. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip plate-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and then extending diagonally left front, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17 ).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size that allows only one game ball to pass through the horizontal portion 71 in the vertical direction. And a discharge hole 74 for the cage. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame lower-side hinge pin 73 is inserted into a lower-body-frame-side lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame-side upper hinge The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the same side as the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42 and is screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32, 42. Further, the lower left side fixing member 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. ..

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 will be described with respect to the locking mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 by the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be described with reference to FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65 and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 63 are diagonally displaced and opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Little load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not loaded. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end face of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with the inner surface of one side, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63 to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the inner side is retained.

Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c that is generated, and to prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc shape, the lock member 66 is positioned such that the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 is directed toward the outside of the front protruding portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at the position where the rotation moment for rotation is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times, and the lock is performed. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in the bearing groove 63 in front of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the unauthorized tool that abuts the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the leading end of the unauthorized tool. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 18B. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal part 71) in the state of being present, the game ball on the horizontal part 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal part 71 due to the presence of the standing wall part 54. Since it is not carried out, there is a possibility that it may be sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a right discharge hole 52. , And the left discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being made by forming a gap with the body frame 4.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a quadrangular outer shape in a front view, a dish unit 200 attached to a lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower right front part of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 500 is attached so as to penetrate the dish unit 200.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 and the like, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that has a vertically long rectangular outer shape and penetrates forward and backward, A tubular handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front right lower corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And a door frame side that is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left end side in a front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and projects forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit attachment member 160 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560 are provided. There is.

The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is vertically arranged in rows and swells forward, and has an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202. And a plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image. A production operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper dish production button 257 that can be operated by a player, a dish unit cover 260 that covers the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper dish 201 when viewed from the front. A lower door right effect unit 270 that has a lower door right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, a transparent effect unit cover 300 that covers the lower right door effect unit 270 from the front side, and an upper plate An upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in 201 to the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball removing unit 320 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward, and a game store In the island facility, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210. A main dish top decorative member 340 capable of luminescent decoration is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 24, FIG. 25, etc., the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 partially attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side, and a unit base 360 having a light-transmitting property. A front decoration member 370 having a translucent property, which is attached to the front left and right center of the front surface of the 360 and bulges forward, and a top speaker which is installed in the top decoration member 370 and outputs a sound in a high range ( (Not shown), and a door frame decoration board 380 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent left side decoration member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decoration member 420. 3, a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) attached to the upper left corner of the unit 3, and a door frame having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front side of the unit base 410 And a left decorative substrate 440.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front surface of the right side decorative member 470. 3, a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) attached at a position which is the upper right corner of the unit 3, and a plurality of LEDs on the front face attached between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470. And a door frame right decoration board (not shown) to which is attached.

The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a handle main body 502 attached to the handle attaching member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and rotatably attached to the handle main body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and that rotatably supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And are equipped with. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle body 502 and a handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142) that is attached to the handle body 502 and detects the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The cage includes a stop button that can be operated by the player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) that is mounted in the handle main body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 54 to 56, etc., is a shallow box-shaped unit main body that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has the front side opened. 522 and a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522 are mainly provided. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage that connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 210a of the plate unit 200. 526, a full tank ball receiving port 528 that is open rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front, and is capable of communicating with the full tank guide path of the lower tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4, A foul that receives a game ball (fal ball) that has been opened upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front and has not been reached in the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the full ball receiving port 528 that opens forward in the lower right corner of the front view and the game ball received in the foul ball receiving port 530 are discharged, and the lower plate ball supplying port of the dish unit 200 is released. 210c, and a sphere discharge port 532 communicating with 210c.

As shown in FIG. 24, FIG. 25, etc., the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends left and right and the rear side of which is open. A unit cover 544 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side open, and the upper plate of the dish unit 200 that opens to the front. The ball entrance 546 into which the game balls stored in 201 enter, the ball discharge port 548 which is capable of discharging the game balls entering the ball entrance 546, and which opens rearward, and the ball entrance A game ball that has entered into 546 can be discharged, and a ball discharge port 550 that is open to the front below the ball entrance 546 is provided. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 is a ball feed solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for releasing the game balls that have entered from the ball entry port 546 one by one from the ball release port 548, and the ball entry. It is provided with a switching mechanism that switches the game ball that has entered through the port 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped unit frame 562 which is larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. A pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562 are provided.

[3-1. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 to 41. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the installation base unit of the performance operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the installation base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

In addition, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit that is disassembled and viewed from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and seen from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit disassembled and seen from below. 39 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 40 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. 39. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a unit.

Further, FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the lower right door effect unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door effect unit, and FIG. 43(a) is a lower right door effect unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. FIG. 44 is a DD sectional view of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 42(b). FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the lower right door rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 49(a) is a front view showing a state where the lower right door rotor of the lower right door effect unit faces the front, and FIG. 49(b) is a front view showing a state where the lower right door rotor is facing the rear.

Further, FIG. 50(a) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper dish ball removing unit of the dish unit is attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50(b) is the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the rear. In addition, FIG. 53A is a perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53B is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit as disassembled and seen from the front.

The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. This dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 which stores game balls to be shot into the game area 5a and which is dispensed from the dispensing device 830, and a game which is arranged below the upper dish 201 and which is supplied from the upper dish 201. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit base 210, and the left side from the center in the left and right bulges forward to a large extent. And a lower plate body 214 that is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front of the plate unit base 210 and that bulges significantly forward and forms the lower plate 202. ..

In addition, the dish unit 200 covers the front operation side of the upper dish body 212 and the front operation side of the dish unit base 210, the upper operation dish body 212, the lower dish operation body 214, and the front operation side and the lower operation side of the production operation unit. Dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, lower door right production unit 270 arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 220 and attached to the front right portion of the dish unit base 210, and lower door right production unit Performance unit cover 300 that covers the front side of 270 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and game balls that are attached so as to sandwich the dish unit base 210 from the front and back and are stored in the upper dish 201 of the upper dish body 212. Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for extracting the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202, and lower plate ball removing unit for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward, which is attached to the lower side of the lower plate body 214. And 320.

Further, the dish unit 200 is mounted on the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of a game store, and a dish. The upper plate top decoration member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and is capable of emitting light, and the plate unit cover 260, which is attached to the left side of the front face of the plate unit base 210, can emit light forward. The plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs and the rear of the rendering unit cover 300 and the lower right of the door rendering unit 270 are mounted on the right side of the front of the dish unit base 210 and face forward. A dish unit right decorative substrate 346 provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and a plate upper front decorative substrate 233, a plate upper rear decorative substrate 235, and a plate which are attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 210 and will be described later. Of the liquid crystal substrate 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the effect button decoration substrate 251, the effect button pressing sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, the plate unit left decorative board 345, and the plate unit right decorative board 346 and the game board 5. The dish unit relay board 347 relays the connection with the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown).

[3-1a. Plate unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 210a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 210a. And a speaker slit 210b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending up and down, a lower dish ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a lower dish. An upper plate ball feed port 210d is provided which penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the ball supply port 210c in a front view, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

Further, the dish unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a quadrangular inner circumference that penetrates forward and backward on the left side in a front view of the upper bowl feeding port 210d, and a receiving part that projects forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape port 210g that penetrates in the front and rear direction on the upper right side in front view of the upper bowl feeding port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates in the front and rear direction in the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i that penetrates the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner in the front view and into which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the right side of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c in the front view. And a cutout portion 210j that is cut out from the rear end to the front side.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the upper plate body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward and backward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a which is open only to the left and the rear on the right end side in front view and through which game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined such that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper plate body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. Is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the delivery port 210d.

Further, the upper plate body 212 is provided with a metal ground metal fitting 212b extending from the left and right center to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the earth metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and by contacting the game ball, static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower plate body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a trapezoidal plan view in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The lower plate main body 214 has a ball-draining hole 214a that penetrates the bottom face vertically and can be closed by the lower plate ball-draining unit 320, and the bottom face is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball-draining hole 214a. doing. This lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and also downwardly move the game balls to the lower side of the plate unit 200 from the ball hole 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A that is attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 at the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. The unit cover 224 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and the decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A when viewed from the front.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference at the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A or the dish unit base 210 side, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the transmission of the vibration caused by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220A or the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, the mounting base unit 220A of the performance operation unit 220 is a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has an open upper side. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 that is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and is capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. A front lens member 232, a front plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the front plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231, and provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover that covers the front side of the front plate front lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decorative member 234 attached to 224.

Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231, and has an upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward, and an upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 upper side. Is placed on the unit cover 224 and is attached to the unit cover 224. The rear plate decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the rear plate decorative member 236. Linear light emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light of the above and emitting linearly at the upper end, a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted to the unit cover 224 on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 in front view, and a button mounting member. And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably mounted up and down by 238.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined downward from the front and rear substantially in the center and a mounting side receiving portion 230a that penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated from each other to the left and right. It is provided with one through-hole 230b and a tubular receiving portion 230c that extends downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b. The through hole 230b has a quadrangular inner circumference. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow as it goes downward (see FIG. 41). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is lower than the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to, it extends so as to be directed forward. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

The unit case 231 is opened upward and accommodates the touch unit 220B. The unit case 231 is spaced apart from the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the storage recess 231a in the front and rear directions, respectively, and protrudes upward in pairs in a cylindrical shape. The horizontal support pins 231b, the pair of front support pins 231c that are horizontally spaced apart from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and project upward in a cylindrical shape, and from the center of the housing recess 231a on the front and rear ends of the bottom surface. It has a central support protrusion 231d protruding upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e protruding in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a toward the lower side and separated left and right. ..

In addition, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface, which penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in a front view. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends leftward and rightward on the rear outer peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a and is recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. A notch portion 231h.

The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in which a rectangular shape extending in the left and right and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the quadrangle are combined in plan view. In addition, in the accommodation recess 231a, the bottom surfaces of the quadrangular portions are formed lower than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step difference on the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a is formed to be slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a, and are formed so as to be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b includes a truncated cone-shaped taper portion 231i on the upper end side, the diameter of which becomes smaller toward the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The lateral support pin 231b has the same distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i as the length of the damper 222, and is formed longer than the damper 222 as a whole. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d projects to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a quadrangular outer periphery. The two receiving projections 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. In the receiving projection 231e, the outer peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side inclines toward the front as it goes downward with respect to the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a. And has been extended. Further, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

The front surface of the upper plate front decoration member 234 is exposed to the outside when the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for making the post-upper plate decoration member 236 emit light, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. ..

The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the upper plate post-decoration member 236, and is arranged above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b on the post-upper plate decorative substrate 235, and a light-receiving unit 237a. And a linear light emitting portion 237b in the form of a flat plate which is continuous with and is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside when the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving portion 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving portion 237a to the linear light emitting portion 237b to guide the light from the linear light emitting portion 237b. The entire top can be illuminated (linearly).

The upper dish ball removal button 239 is provided with a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending below the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removing button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 into which the lower ends of the receiving projections 231e are inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. Accordingly, when a force (impact) such that the unit case 231 moves downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is stored. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e abuts the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the attachment-side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the force from the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) side from being dispersed, and to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. ..

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 whose upper side is opened, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 which is mounted in the lower case 240 from the upper side, Inside the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242 disposed on the left and right sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240. Of the shallow box-shaped base member 243, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from the upper side and can display an image controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A frame-shaped ground metal fitting 245 that covers the outer circumference, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a lower case that covers the outer circumference of the touch panel 246 from above and through the base member 243. And a frame-shaped upper cover 247 attached to 240.

In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248, which extends over the entire left and right sides of the rear end surface of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247, is provided. ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending left and right, a flat plate-shaped projecting portion 240b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from both left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and each projecting portion 240b having an outer diameter of the damper 222. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibrating device mounting part 240e to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted, which is disposed near the board mounting part 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting part 240b.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the side where the C shape is open. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c and over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with its center of gravity eccentric. The vibrating device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration driving motor 242a.

The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a formed in a shallow box shape into which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted, and extending portions 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A screw hole 243c is formed at the lower end of the screw hole 243c, the screw hole 243c penetrating vertically at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extending portion 243b, and the upper side having a large spot facing. C-chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 40) having a diameter that increases toward the lower end of the cage.

Regarding the inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, the tip side of the lateral support pin 231b of the unit case 231 can pass through and the base end side (lower side) of the taper portion 231i can pass. It is formed in a size that cannot pass through.

The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is resistant to shock and is hard to break, a transparent capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the outer periphery of the sensor sheet. ing.

In the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 can be attached by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C-shape into the damper attachment recesses 240c provided in pairs on the left and right sides of the lower case 240. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 moves below the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Project.

Further, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration driving motors 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can independently generate vibration.

In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side through the touch panel 246. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player touches the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image, whereby the button of the image can be operated.

Further, the touch unit 220B has a water-proof seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, so that when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid does not enter the touch unit 220B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 of the attachment base unit 220A, and a bottom of the unit main body 250. The effect button decoration board 251 arranged on the side and provided with LEDs on the upper surface, and the board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the effect button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250 are provided.

In addition, the button unit 220C is arranged between the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and has a cylindrical button base 253 that is slidably inserted into the unit body 250 from the upper side to the upper side. A biasing spring member 254, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255. Sheet-shaped diffusing lens member 256 provided with a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. And a production button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

The unit main body 250 includes three mounting pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g, and a flange-shaped shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , A pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf portion 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a upward, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and has a lower end that can penetrate the through hole 250c of the unit body 250 and that projects outward from the lower end and that can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. And a pair of engaging claw portions 253c, which are radially outwardly shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end of which can abut the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit main body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. ing.

The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

The light guide member 255 extends from a lower surface of the disk-shaped main body portion 255a, which is fitted on the upper cylindrical portion 253b of the button base 253, and a lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253, to the lower end portion. And a plurality of cylindrical light guide portions 255b. The plurality of light guides 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and light from the LEDs can be guided and emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body 255a.

In this button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In the button base 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects upward from the upper end of the unit body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claw portions 253c of the button base 253 has the unit body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, further upward movement is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the upper end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 contact the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

Further, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by making the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 emit light. The LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251 are full-color LEDs, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated and decorated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is such that the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240 in the assembled state. Since it also projects downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and the four horizontal support pins 231b are positioned above the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is restricted by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 41, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the damper 222 are A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface thereof. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with its lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is mounted from the upper side in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base unit 220A which is narrowed downward in the mounting base 230. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30 and the like, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). It is exposed in a strip). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting unit 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decorative member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting a game ball in the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image simulating an operation button is displayed, and the touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted, so that the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a state of being floated from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B can be operated by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the vibrating device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, the player can be surprised by making an illusion that he/she is operating an actual operation button despite operating the image operation button. It is possible to prevent the player from entertaining and deteriorating the interest.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the button unit 220C is provided on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player is caused to press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the game state, and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, since the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only touch the touch panel 246, they may lack a sense of operation compared to the actual operation buttons, but the upper plate effect button 257 should be actually pressed. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably entertain the operation of the upper plate production button 257 without giving a feeling of strangeness to the operation of the upper plate production button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. ..

Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged in a region where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 that bulges forward, the game is performed even during an effect using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of being floated from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 is increased. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or impacted from above (load), the left and right lateral support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted damper 222, and the touch unit 220B descends while the damper 222 is descending. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

Then, when the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. As a result, the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed not only by the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b but also by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c.

When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

Further, when the touch unit 220B descends, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that its center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a descend. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the The shock is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are formed in a pyramidal shape that narrows downward, respectively, from the receiving protrusion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is dispersed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the shock applied to the touch unit 220B to the mounting base 230 is arranged in multiple layers, the shock applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like are less likely to be damaged by the impact.

Further, the effect operation unit 220, the linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge of the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the interest of the player can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 causes the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side of the linear light emitting section 237b) to emit light. be able to. By illuminating and decorating the decorative member 236 after the upper plate, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, like the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the plate unit cover 260 by a mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Of the touch unit 220B, and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thus, in the upper plate 201, even if the water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). It is possible to prevent dew condensation water from entering the touch unit 220B, and prevent troubles in the touch unit 220B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for light-emitting decoration of the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends in the left-right direction, has a center in the left-right direction bulge forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. .. The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 that is open to the front substantially at the center of the left and right and has a rear end closed by the plate unit base 210, and the top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. Which is formed on the left side of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220 and the lower plate opening 261 when viewed from the front, and the bass sound of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4. A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a plate unit left decorative member 264 arranged above the speaker grill 263 and light-emitted by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view. The handle opening 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, the bottom plate portion 266 that forms the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 and covers the lower side of the lower dish body 214, and the bottom plate at the left and right centers And a bottom plate opening 267 that penetrates the portion 266 vertically and is closed by the lower dish ball removing unit 320.

The bottom plate opening 261 is closed by the bottom plate body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decoration member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, whereas it has a rugged surface on the right side. Further, the right side of the front view has translucency almost entirely.

The plate unit cover 260 is formed in a state where it can be gripped with one hand between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 when assembled in the plate unit 200. Accordingly, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, it is possible to stabilize the finger (hand or arm) to be touched, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B. Can be done easily.

More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the lower plate cover portion 262 of the touch unit 220B. The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is approximately 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is approximately 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player's hand to grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Right lower door production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, the lower right door effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the game state. It is provided with a spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for light emission decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 and a unit base 271 that is attached so as to close the escape port 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right door rotator 270A. A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotating shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a driven gear 273. A shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271 is provided.

Further, the lower door right effect unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotator 270A from the driven gear 274, and the rotor side bearing member 276 rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the lower right door. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotator 270A on the side opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotator 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the front left side of the lower right door 270A of the door, and a rear member attached to the front side of the unit base 271. A door lower right base decorative board 280 having a plurality of LEDs, a door lower right drive motor 272 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative board 280, and a door described later. A lower right relay board 281 for relaying the connection between the lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided.

The lower right door rotary body 270A constitutes an outer shell and is arranged between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which has a hemispherical shell shape, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular cutouts 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. The front outer shell member 285 is a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface, has a belt-like decoration 285b that has a metallic luster and extends in a belt-like shape in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape that is arranged in the center of the belt-like decoration 285b. Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b that has a metallic luster and extends in the circumferential direction in a band shape on the surface of a translucent hemispherical shell. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a disk-shaped lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The first fixed shaft member 292 and the first fixed shaft member 292, which have a cylindrical shape and which are attached to the right lower rotary body of the door and extend perpendicularly to the surface of the rotary base plate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275. A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and has its tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. And the second fixed shaft member 293. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right door relay board 281 and the lower right door rotary body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

The rotary body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291 and is attached to the insides of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, and is a flat plate-shaped transparent reflector base 294. The first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 and has an annular shape and opens outward in the axial direction, and the first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 through the inside of the ring, and has a hexagonal shape at the center. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on their surfaces, and can reflect the light from the lower right door rotating body decorative substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat plate-shaped ribs.

In this rotary body internal unit 290, a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Separated from each other for relative rotation.

The unit base 271 is a flat ring-shaped ring portion 271a arranged on the rear side of the lower right door 270A of the door and a portion obliquely upper right as viewed from the front with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a. Of the first projecting piece 271b, the second projecting piece 271c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and the second projecting piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which a U-shaped recess is formed rearward from the front end and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (the right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotating shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the driving gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a mounted on the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b protruding in a tubular shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door 270A in between. The two rotation detection sensors 275 include a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49(a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rear (FIG. 49(b)). And) can be detected respectively.

The lower right door production unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door driving motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward. Whether or not a chance is coming can be suggested to the player depending on whether or not it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the player.

Further, in the lower right door production unit 270, since the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the lower right door rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached, during the rotation of the lower right door rotating body 270A, the right door door is rotated. When the lower rotating body decoration substrate 291 (the LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and at the same time, the first reflector 295 and the Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 does not blink, the door lower right rotating body 270A emits light as if the light was blinking. By irradiating various colors of light from the LED, the lower right door 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color, which can entertain the player.

[3-1 g. Performance unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rendering unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a semi-spherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower door right rotating body 270A of the lower door right producing unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotary body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the dish unit cover 260 in front view, and the decorative portion 302 on the lower right side of the rotary body cover portion 301 that penetrates in the front-back direction and And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

The effect unit cover 300 is in the shape of a container with an open rear, and has a light-transmitting property. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotary body cover section 301 is light-emitted and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotary body cover section 301 is a dish unit right decorative board 346. Decorated with light.

[3-1h. Upper plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side, and the rear side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extension piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 attached to a position that is located at the upper left of the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and that is rotated by pressing the upper bowl ball removing button 239, and a pressure transmission member. A first spring member 314 for urging the upper plate ball removing button 239 in the direction in which it rises.

Further, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feed opening 210d from the rear side of the dish unit base 210, and a rear base member. 315 and the dish unit base 210, and is mounted by the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down, and the upper dish ball removing slider 316 in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side, and the upper dish ball removing And a second spring member 317 that biases the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and has a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extending portions that extend in a flat plate shape from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The projecting piece 312b, the shaft supporting part 312c that is recessed rearward from the front end of the extending part 312b in a U shape, and the front end of the base part 312a are provided near the lower end of the front surface, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The pressing force transmission member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft supporting portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extending plate-shaped rearward extending from the shaft portion 313a. An upward extending piece 313c that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearward extending piece 313b in a flat plate shape so that the lower end of the extending piece 239c of the upper dish ball pulling button 239 can abut. A downwardly extending piece 313d that extends downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b, and a downwardly projecting portion from below under the left end in front view of the shaft portion 313a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extension piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it extends rearward, and the lower end thereof is capable of contacting the upper dish ball removing slider 316.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210 and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and a front side of the base portion 315a, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The slider support portion 315b slidably supporting both left and right ends of the ball removing slider 316, and the front end is opened at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper dish ball feed port 210d of the dish unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and through which game balls can flow.

In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward from the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is open rearward, and has a lower end curved rearwardly. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the first guide path 315d, then extends leftward in front view, is open at the left end to the left, and is open rearward as a whole; A plate-shaped passage cover 315f that closes the rear end side of the guide path 315e that extends to the left, and the base portion 315a in the front-back direction so that two sides are surrounded by the L-shaped second guide path 315e. An opening 315g penetrating therethrough and a spring locking portion 315h protruding forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked are provided.

The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined such that the portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 50(b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and is connected to the second guide path 315e. The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper dish ball removing slider 316 is a flat plate-shaped slider base 316a whose left and right ends are slidably supported by the slider support portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left side to the front side in the front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b, which extends through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f and can contact the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313, and a slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmission portion 316c that projects rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-shaped spring member that projects from the front surface of the slider base 316a and locks the lower end of the second spring member 317. And a stop 316d.

In the upper dish ball removing unit 310, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened to the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate body 212 in a front view when the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper entrance 315c through the first guiding portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

Further, when the upper dish ball pulling button 239 is pressed downward, the upper dish ball punching unit 310 causes the pressing transmission member 313 to resist the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extending piece 239a of the upper dish ball punching button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates around the shaft portion 313a in a direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the transmitting piece 316b of the upper dish ball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d is in contact causes the upper dish ball to be removed. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

When the upper bowl ball removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmitting section 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feeding unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feeding unit 540, and the first guide path. The 315d side is in communication with the second taxiway 315e side. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

It should be noted that when the downward pressing of the upper plate ball removing button 239 is released, the upper plate ball removing slider 316 and the upper plate ball removing button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. You can return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower plate ball removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260, and is a ball of the lower plate body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removing base 321 having an opening 321a that coincides with the hole 214a, and a flat plate-like slide lid 322 capable of sliding left and right on the lower dish ball removing base 321 to close the opening 321a. And a knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. A member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321a is opened against the biasing force of the spring member 324 are provided.

The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right side from the center in the left and right as viewed from the front. By attaching the lower dish ball removing base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported from side to side between the lower dish ball removing base 321 and the lower dish body 212. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in the front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removing base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b that can open and close from the main body 325a and can hold the holding projection 322a. When the holding projection 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b and holds the holding projection 322a, and at the same time, holds the pair of holding claws 322a. The claw 325b is maintained in the closed state. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

In the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a of the lower dish main body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right when viewed from the front. It is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 without being positioned below and the game balls in the lower plate 202 coming out from the ball hole 214a.

From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls in the lower plate 202 can come out to the lower side of the plate unit 200 through the ball removing holes 214a and the openings 321a, and the game balls in the lower plate 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projections 322a of the slide lid 322 are held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b to release the holding protrusion 322a, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball hole 214a is closed. In this way, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 or remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, etc., the ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 has a translucent unit case 331 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end in front view, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and that can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and that can be operated by the player. A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333 is provided.

This ball lending operation unit 330, when the cash or prepaid card is inserted into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then the ball lending button 332 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit. It is possible to lend (pay) to the upper plate 201 of 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan. In addition, the display unit 334 displays cash or the number of prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine fails, or the like.

[3-1k. Plate top decoration material]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate top decoration member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper left and right center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in the left and right bands. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b mounted on the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its upper surface.

The upper plate top decoration member 340 can cause the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LEDs of the upper plate top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decorations such as the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating and decorating 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 is prevented from deteriorating the interest. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effect of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of the present embodiment, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a, and the game ball in the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by hitting, a strip shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (field of view) The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like entering from outside can be noticed, and the line of sight (interest) of the player can be attracted to the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Therefore, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the effect such as an image is presented according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light, so that the player can use the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. The presentation of the presentation can be made noticeable, and the presentation by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be made entertaining and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity is displayed, it is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is displayed indicates the arrival of a chance, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be cared for. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), a tight game with a sense of speed can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from moving to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 by causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light when displaying an image that suggests the arrival of a chance on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the player pay attention, and to surely recognize the arrival of the opportunity to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may cause the player to be unable to concentrate on either side, which may reduce the interest. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in response to the arrival, it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, and entertain the game in the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, and it is possible to keep the game clear and to prevent getting bored.

Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 that bulges toward the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 difficult to see from other players next to or behind. The effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and deteriorating by being watched by another player, and at the same time, the upper plate liquid crystal display device can be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when the effect is presented by 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and entertain the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a dot shape, and thus the player Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to make the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like notice easily, and entertaining the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, and the like. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, a light-emitting mode different from that of other light-emitting decorations and the like can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce erroneous recognition as light-emission of light-emitting decorations and the like. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like can be surely noticed.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a rear position near the game area 5a on the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, The light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like can be easily made visible to the player, and the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like can be noticed to entertain the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

Further, the plate operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is set within the game area 5a. Since the player turns his or her line of sight to check the amount of game balls to be stowed at a certain frequency, when the line of sight is turned to the upper plate 201, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns his or her line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight to the upper plate 201 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) from within the game area 5a. Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately moved to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the entertainment presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the production operation unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the game area 5a, and the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is radiated to the player from the lower side, it is arranged on the upper side of the game area 5a. Compared with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see and to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible for the player to surely pay attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to entertain the effect by the operation unit 200 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. Even if the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is easily noticed, the player can be surely focused on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the effect by the image, an effect of causing the player to operate the touch panel 246 can be performed, and the player can be entertained with various effects. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from actively entertaining the effect and deteriorating the interest.

Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (the linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B moves the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). Along with the guide passage portion 212a for feeding, an upper dish ball removing button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removing unit 310 is provided between the guide passage portion 212a and the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, attracting the player's interest to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of touch operation, etc.).

In addition, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper plate lower cover portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate body 212 and the surface of the game ball are exposed by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows under the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and thus the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for light-emitting decoration of the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

Furthermore, in the operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch device 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality (two) of touch units 220B are provided. Since the damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. This means that the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch operation is performed on the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, and thus the touch panel of the touch unit 220B is presented to the player. The operation feeling of 246 can be sufficiently given, and it is possible to prevent the player from delighting the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and deteriorating the interest.

Moreover, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B or suggests the timing of operating the touch panel 246. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 from the lower side, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from the upper side and a shock or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 is used. Since it is possible to absorb the impact and the like, it is possible to reduce damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, and the like due to the impact and the like, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch unit 220B and the like. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

In addition, since the touch panel 246 is used as the operation unit of the touch unit 220B, the touch panel 246 is touched longer when the player operates the button than when the button is pressed. When the vibration unit 242 vibrates the touch unit 220B when touching 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player's finger can be vibrated to make the player feel that the touch panel 246 is being operated, so that a sufficient operation feeling can be given and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, it is possible to easily change the type of touch operation (button), and it is possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest of the player from decreasing due to various effects. Further, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, more various operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward, and the touch unit 220B can be moved by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be facilitated accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B, which was thought not to move, vibrates according to the game state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the player.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibrating devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibrating device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, the vibrating device 242 is made strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed of the wrong operation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation effect using the touch panel 246 from being enjoyed and prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. You can Therefore, by controlling the respective vibrating devices 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operation feeling or to greatly surprise the player. It is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from above and a shock or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B can absorb (attenuate) the impact from the upper side to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side through the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted in the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since the gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to the impact or load from the touch unit 220B. The impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231 and is transmitted to the mounting base 230. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c contact each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is transmitted in an oblique direction to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend becomes smaller and is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from the upper side, the shock and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B and It is possible to prevent the mounting base unit 220A from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. 54A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. 55A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 55B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As illustrated, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the front surface of the unit body 522 and a shallow box-shaped unit body 522 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and the front side is open. And a plate-shaped lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball that connects the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 210a of the plate unit 200. A passage 526, and a full-bulb ball receiving opening 528 that is open to the rear on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 in a front view and is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding passage 862 of the lower full-bulb ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; Equipped with.

In addition, the foul cover unit 520 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front side. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball) and a front full-ball opening 528 and a game ball received in the foul ball receiving port 530 are opened toward the front in the lower right corner of the front view. A ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200 is also provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528, the foul ball receiving port 530, and the ball discharging port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width; a flat plate-shaped movable piece 534 which is a part of an inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 522; A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 that urges the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

In the foul cover unit 520, if the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 520 is stored in the storage passage 533 to some extent. The number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 is rotated so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of game balls, so when the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the tank is full, further payout of game balls is stopped and This can be notified to a player or an attendant of a game shop to urge the lower plate 202 to be filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through ball passage 526, and the guide path opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. It is provided with a door opening/closing contact portion 537 with which the operating protrusion 863e of 863 can contact (see FIG. 79). The door opening/closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. The door opening/closing abutting portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway door member 863 comes into contact. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing part 863 comes into contact with the door opening/closing contact part 537, the guideway door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game shop above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front side left side surface of the main body frame base 600 are provided. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base in front view. The outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body which is openably and closably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The main body frame base 600 penetrates forward and backward from a position slightly lower than the upper end in a range of a height of about 3/4, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game. The game board placing portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and the left and right ends of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrude upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placing portion 602. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the backward movement.

Further, the main body frame 4 is a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a front and rear side on the right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. Cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates through the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates from the center in the front and left of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and bottom to the front and back. And a circular opening 607 for a speaker, which penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in a front view of the game board placing portion 602 and which faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. And are equipped with.

Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in front view, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface thereof, and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end thereof. The rear extension 608 is provided. Further, the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions on the rear surface at the left end in front view, and has an upper hinge mounting portion 609 and a lower hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

In addition, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view, The game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame upper hinge member 60, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 in a front view to pivotally support the door frame upper hinge member 140. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame 4 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

The body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates up and down at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. An outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. -Shaped plate material is bent upward in an L-shape to vertically penetrate through the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643, and the lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 on the door frame side. The lower hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the lower hinge hole 644 for the door frame in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend rearward from the left end and extend upward. And a restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of No.

The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally extended portion with a certain distance above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The main body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion. The main body side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion where the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 are bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, in the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 is restricted from moving forward and vertically. A set of left positioning members 661 is attached vertically separated from each other.

This reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600, and from the left side through the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 into the main body frame 4 (game board 5). It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launch device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the turning angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 680 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a flat plate-shaped launching base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a batting mallet 683 having a base end attached to a rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward leftward extension from the vicinity of the tip of the batting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and on which a game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, the game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle lever 504 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, when the hit game ball does not reach within the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the bottom to the foul ball receiving port 530 of the foul cover unit 520 below, and passes through the foul cover unit 520 and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 that project forward from the unit base 701 and that can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and columnar projections from the lower part of the unit base 701 to the front and from the front side. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 depending on the direction of rotation of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72. 61 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 65(a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 65(b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 67A is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 67B is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 70(a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 70(b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (a). 71(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 71(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. Is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged part of the payout blade in the payout device.

Further, FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 74(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 74(b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 75(a) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75(b) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-ball path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 78(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and FIG. 78(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is opened. .. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the payout unit.

As shown in FIG. 61, FIG. 62, etc., the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from an island facility of a game store (not shown) in a box shape that extends to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. It is provided with a tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two rows in the front and back by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) hanging swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side in the front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And are equipped with. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the game balls are paid out one by one.

Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and plays the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. A normal guiding path 861 that guides the game ball forward to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e to the front side of the door frame 3 A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full tank guideway 862 and the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 that guide to the full tank receiving port 530, according to opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. And a lower full ball path unit 860 having a.

[4-6a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821, and has a front side open. 821 and the rear case 822, which are mounted between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 to partition the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a partition plate 823 that penetrates the partition plate 823 to form front and rear ends in the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are respectively arranged in the front case and the rear case. A ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the pair of movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that allows the game balls to pass through at the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide outlet that allows the game balls to pass through at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 821b, a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a cutout portion 821g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guide inlet 822a that is open to allow the game balls to pass in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide outlet that is open to allow the game balls to pass at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 822d along the left side of the rear case 822. It is composed of a detecting portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detecting portion 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a cutout portion 822g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the rear case 822 is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and a shaft member 824 inserted therethrough, and the movable piece 825a. An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, connecting the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper part of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the extending portion 825c. A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and a flat piece that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. And a stopper piece 825g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is located immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is projected into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. The stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member front 825 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 825a to move toward the guide passage 821c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates the shaft member 824 in the front and rear direction at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and the movable piece 826a. From the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right side of the movable piece 826a, the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and a flat portion that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. And a stopper piece 826g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is projected into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e). The stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction when viewed from the front), the movable piece member front 826 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 826a to move toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is not detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row by the tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged. By 822, it is possible to guide the dispensing device 830 below in a two-row state (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can be distributed well. You can

Further, when the game sphere flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game sphere comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are formed. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are in the non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is understood that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls or the like, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c will flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d becomes strong, and the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d is a movable piece above the detection parts 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the vibration sandwiches or intrudes between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the cutouts 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Dirt, dust, and the like that have accumulated can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can satisfactorily rotate due to their own weight and the like.

Further, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member front 825. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the rear piece member 826 is detected by the single out-of-ball detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front portion 825 Or, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member rear 826 rotate so as to project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. .. Therefore, it is possible to detect the out-of-ball of the game ball early, so that the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time when the game is interrupted is shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by screwing and attaching metal screws as weights to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weights of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight are set. By this, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls, so that the self-weight etc. With this, it is possible to satisfactorily rotate, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

In this way, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end projects into the guiding passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to its own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting with the game ball, the movable piece 825a is moved by the weight of the weight and weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt inside the guide passages 821c and 822c are not formed. Does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls, so that the self-weight etc. This allows the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) to rotate satisfactorily, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a defect such that the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes to attach the weight, even if the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate frequently, The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time. .. Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 by simply screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor of attaching the weight can be simplified. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, since the movable pieces 825a and 825c are provided with an introduction portion 822d that guides the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c on the upstream side of the site where the movable pieces 825a and 825c project inside, the guide is provided. Since the game ball abuts the movable pieces 825a and 826a by flowing the game balls in the passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust, dust, and the like that are sandwiched between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and that are invaded. The front one piece member 825 and the rear one piece member 826 can be rotated favorably.

Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection and the like. In addition, even if the gaming balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game balls can be replenished to the player, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The payout device 830 has a box-like shape with an open rear side, and a payout opening 831a in which a game ball is opened in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction and a game ball is opened in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout exit 831b, a ball removal exit 831c in which a game ball is open near the right end in the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b and allows the game ball to flow. , And a front box 831 having a ball drop passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout path 831d and communicates with the ball exit 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening with the front side open, and a payout opening 832a in the center of the top surface that allows the game ball to pass through in the left-right direction, and a payout in the bottom surface that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view. An outlet 832b, a ball removal outlet 832c that is open in the vicinity of the right end of the bottom surface when viewed from the front, a payout passage 832d that communicates the payout opening 832a and the payout exit 832b, and payouts. It is provided with a rear box 832 that branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball outlet 832c and has a ball passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and the rotation shaft which is attached to the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. And a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshes with each other so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can rotate. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 are rotatably pierced so that the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 which is rotatably mounted through the shaft member 837 and is provided with payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. And a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and that detects the rotation of the delivery blade 839. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 for partitioning the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout exits 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passage. 831e and 832e are rotatably attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a branching point, and a ball-removing movable piece 843 that can close the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e and the front box 831 and the rear box 831. The box 832 is provided with a ball-pulling lever 844 that is attached so as to be vertically slidable on the upper right side surface of the box 832 and that makes the ball-pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball exit 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 of the entire height of the front box 831. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the front box 831 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about ¼ of the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The payout vane 839 is disposed in a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 831d that extends obliquely to the lower right from the delivery opening 831a is further extended. There are branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d, and a guide shelf 831f protruding rearward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about ⅓ of the total height of the rear box 832. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the rear box 832. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about ¼ from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The payout vane 839 is disposed in a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 832d that extends obliquely from the delivery inlet 832a to the lower right is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832. There are branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is arranged. A payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are located before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. The payout sensor 842 is moved to the vicinity of the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at intervals of an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c that is formed in a cylindrical shape rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a and that has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface at the rear end and that can be connected to the payout blade 839 are provided. ..

The payout blade 839 extends in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and a base cylindrical portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a at a constant circumferential interval from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a. A plurality of (three) front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction such that the front blade 839b is staggered from the rear end. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected part that is formed in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a to the front and has a concavo-convex shape that can be connected to the connecting part 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

Each of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the payout blade 839 is provided at three intervals at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c and the rear blade 839c are arranged so as to be staggered so as to alternate. It is offset at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center side, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a sphere accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game sphere is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 about the axis of the base tubular portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a in the arcuate portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2)/2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the sphere accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is quadrupled.

Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball can be held by the arc-shaped portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, the depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. This allows the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d to be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the trailing blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blade 839 is arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a portion which is bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Then, in the crank-shaped bent portions of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In this embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball storage portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game balls flowing down onto the payout blade 839 come into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent parts of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout exits 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since the depth of /7 to 1/4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time required for accommodating the game balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout vane 839 is rotated quickly, the game ball can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of payouts of the game ball per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time taken to pay out the game ball can be shortened.

The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends vertically and forward and backward in a plate shape, and a lower portion is bent to be formed in a character shape in a front view, and a main body portion 843a extends forward and backward in a tubular shape at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b, both ends of which are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer surface of the main body portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a main body portion 843c. And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 71) formed of a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a V shape.

In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to rotate at a position that extends obliquely from the payout entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 hits the protrusion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right side in a front view. Touching. As a result, the ball-removable movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 71A).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-removing movable piece 843 that is bent in a dogleg shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extending to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball passage passages 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 (main body 843a) closes the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and the left-side surface of the main body 843a forms part of the walls of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

In a normal state, the ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front is exerted, the normal state is maintained because the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844.

When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. The ball-removable movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body portion 843a comes into contact with the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60(b)). As a result, the ball removal passages 831e, 832e are opened, and the game balls that have entered from the payout openings 831a, 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d, 832d. The ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front to open the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, flow through the opened ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and are discharged downward from the ball-removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, the weight of the metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-leaving lever 844. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 is projected into the ball-removing passages 381e, 832e by the weight of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. Direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) can be easily rotated.

Further, in a normal state in which the ball removing lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removing passages 831e, 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a, 832a enter the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-removing movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to remove dust, dust, and the like that are sandwiched between the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e by the vibration of the ball-removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-removing movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting of dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d formed as the through hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 frequently rotates, the weight removes the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost related to can be reduced.

By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removing movable piece 843 for a long period of time, fine dust may be attached to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft may be rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843, so the ball removing passage 831e causes the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball pulling lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward and unlocked, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removing movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be surely opened.

Therefore, when the ball removing lever 844 is operated to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be reliably performed. It is possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper tank ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper tank ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and is open on the front side. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 850 is an upper payout ball receiving opening 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through at a site on the left side from the left-right center in the front view, and the right side from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface. The upper ball removal inlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game balls can pass in the region of, and is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge opening 850d that opens downward at a position immediately below the upper payout sphere receiving opening 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and the upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, and an upper ball storage passage that projects upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. And a partition 850f partitioning the lower part inside 850c into left and right.

In addition, the upper tank ball passage unit 850, the upper ball removal passage 850g for guiding the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and the upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. The upper tank full ball path unit 850 has a normal outlet 850d, a tank outlet 850e, and an upper ball outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view, and opens downward. Further, the upper tank full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper tank base 851.

In this upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout exit 831b of the payout device 830 and the upper ball removing entrance 850b is in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800. It is located directly below the ball removal outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full-tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guideways of the lower full-ball path unit 860. Each of 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 has an opening right above the rear end opening (see FIG. 80).

In the upper tank ball path unit 850, the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is emitted from the normal emission port 850d.

When the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and further, the normal guideway 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when the game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 in accordance with the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full-ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full-ball path unit 850 of the payout unit base 801. The lower tank ball path unit 860 is a normal guide path 861 for guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And, a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3, and normally. A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a guideway opening/closing door 863 that is a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

In addition, the lower tank full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball exit port 850h of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. It is provided with a lower ball guide passage 865 for discharging to

In the lower tank full ball path unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are sequentially arranged from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 have rear ends open upward. Further, the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low. Furthermore, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that are vertically separable.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864 in a front view. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower tank full ball path unit 860, the full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the ball. The guideway opening/closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The taxiway opening/closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends in a flat plate shape from the base portion 863a to the upper left side obliquely and can close the front end opening of the taxiway path 861 normally. , A second door plate portion 863c extending from the base portion 863a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to a diagonally lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end portion of the extending portion 863d and can come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 does not require sealing the openings, and it is sufficient that the game balls cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centering on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to project forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is urged in the clockwise direction in front view by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is provided below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

In the lower full ball path unit 860 of this embodiment, the front end of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 has a through ball passage 526, a full ball socket 530, and a door opening/closing member in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). The guideway opening/closing door 863 has no contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the guideway opening/closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Is rotated in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 78). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game ball in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guide The game ball does not spill from the path 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening/closing abutting portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 to rotate the guide path opening/closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861. Also, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 78(b)). In this state, as shown in the drawing, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861 and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. ..

When the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank path are full. The penetrating ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862, and the penetrating ball passage 526 penetrates from the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 side. The game ball can be handed over to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

As described above, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are changed by vertically changing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862, and by rotating the guide path opening/closing door 863. Since it is opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening/closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening/closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 201. When is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guideway 861 is filled with the game ball, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of game balls to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 202 in addition to the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520. The game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. When the movable balls 534 are rotated by the game balls being stored in the storage passage 533 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

In addition, the stop of the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. The number of fillings of the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guiding passage 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, and the upper spherical storage passage 850c of the upper full tank ball path unit 850 in the state of being maintained. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than conventional pachinko machines, so in the gaming state where a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are paid out by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and entertain.

[4-7. Board unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and a bass speaker inside the board unit base 910 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and the speaker unit 920 which is mounted on the rear side and internally controls the interface. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is housed, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board in which a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls is mounted inside the interface control board box 940. And a box 950.

The payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board. 82 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the right front, FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the left front, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and seen from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 87 is a front view in which the front component member and the front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Also, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the rear end of the game region 5a by partitioning the outer periphery of the game region 5a and having an outer shape of a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by hitting the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 142) for controlling the game contents. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and also holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game balls that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the playing area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing, and the first special drawing result or the second starting that is selected by accepting the game balls into the first starting opening 2002. It is provided with a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, in which it is possible to receive a game ball depending on the result of a second special lottery drawn by receiving a game ball into the mouth 2004. .. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two big winning openings, a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls flow (FIG. 87).

Further, a count indicator 2007 is arranged at the center of the lower part of the second special winning opening 2006 (see FIG. 87). This count display 2007 will be described later within a certain period (for example, a period from the start to the end of one big hit game, a period during which probability improvement control is being executed, a period during which time saving control is being executed, etc.). Based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554 and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is paid out. It controls to display the total number. It should be noted that in the count display 2007 of the present example, a prize is paid out based on the fact that the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554 and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557 have detected a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 2006. When updating the total number of spheres, the minimum unit is incremented by one. Further, in this example, after the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554 and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, the count indicator 2007 is displayed with a delay for a certain period. Start updating (delaying). In addition, the interval when counting up the display of the count display 2007 detects one game ball over a time longer than 0.6 seconds which is the shortest interval at which the ball can be driven by the ball launching device 680. The interval is such that "15" corresponding to the number of award balls (15 in this case) that can be obtained based on what is done is added. In this way, in the count display 2007 of this example, the update of the display is started with a delay from the detection of the incoming ball, and the update interval is relatively long. Therefore, the count display 2007 of the count display 2007 during the big hit game is being executed. Updates are hard to break.

The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1111 in the center of the technique area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a first special winning opening 2005, and a starting operation. The side unit lower 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 in the front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side unit lower 2200, is attached above the left end in the front view. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached to the center of the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, has a box shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage unit 2000, and a lock attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in front view inside the back box 3010 for discharging the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit for discharging the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500, which is attached near the front end of the lower right corner in the front case inside the back box 3010. 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatably attached rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 which is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Rear lower movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, upper back left movable production unit 3200 attached on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and the rear box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper mounted on the rear box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape along a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to an upper right diagonal position after passing through a center upper end in the left and right direction in front view. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to decrease toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. An upper end of 1001 is connected, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. The backflow preventing member is rotated only in the open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is rotated and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. 1007 is provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an out port 1111 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

In the state where the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled on the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 85) can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and 142. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator including one LED for displaying a game status, and two LEDs based on a result of a normal lottery selected by passing a game ball to the gate 2003. The normal symbol display which displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by blinking control, and the variable display of the normal symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition for change display has not yet been established, and acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 2002 (start prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result selected by (generation), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the first special lottery result. The first special symbol display and the number of holdings which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established among the variable displays of the first special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. A first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display, and eight LEDs to blink based on the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 (occurrence of the start winning) A second special symbol display device for displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result after the variable display of the second special symbol by controlling, and acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of changing displays for which the starting condition for the changing display has not yet been established, of the changing display of the second special symbol pertaining to When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening and closing patterns of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And is mainly equipped.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 86. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 142) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 142). reference).

[5-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1601 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. 1602, and. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two liquid crystal screens facing the front, and two fixing grooves 3010c opened to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and 85 to 87. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface. In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is drawn by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, which can accept the game balls, are provided.

Three (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the other one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate unit 2003 to the right in front view. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 located near the upper right of the front in the game area 5a is located immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 87, the second special winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 is a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls flow. It is composed by. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged such that the second upper special winning opening 2006a is located near the lower right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed from the front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1111 in the center of the technique area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a first special winning opening 2005, and a starting operation. The side unit lower 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 in the front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side unit lower 2200, is attached above the left end in the front view. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached to the center of the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 88. 88A is a perspective view of the starting opening unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the starting opening unit as seen from the rear. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out opening 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first special winning opening 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first special winning opening 2005 which is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in the left-right direction, and has a first special winning opening 2005, and the first in the unit base 2101. A ball receiving portion 2102 that projects forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction above the special winning opening 2005 and forms a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. Sphere guide portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start opening sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start opening 2002, The first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the one big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big winning opening 2005 from the rear side, and the front end is open to the front with substantially the same size as the first big winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first special winning opening door which is a horizontally long rectangular flat plate whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first special winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 and driving the first special winning opening door member 2112 to open and close, and a member 2112 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first large winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111. A starter unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection with a starter unit decoration board (not shown) attached to the bottom of the unit case 2111 for illuminating the first special winning opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first big winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open to the front in a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time.

The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is a unit base by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided to the rear side of 2101 and being detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can pass through the first attacker unit 2110 and be discharged downward. In the present embodiment, two first starting opening sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting opening sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting opening is detected. In 2002, it is determined that the game ball has been accepted. As a result, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act due to the insertion of a fraudulent tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the rear into the mouth 2005 to close the first special winning opening 2005. The first special winning opening door member 2112 is erected in a state where the first special winning opening 2005 is closed, and the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by a unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and forward. By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is in a non-energized state) and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first special winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be located. In other words, the first special winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first special winning opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first special winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first big winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, is accepted by the first special winning opening 2005, and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first special winning opening 2005 is discharged from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2114.

[5-8b. Below the side unit]
Next, the lower side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89(a) is a perspective view of the side unit bottom and the side unit in the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 89(b) is a perspective view of the side unit bottom and the side unit seen from the back. The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

The lower side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a flat plate-shaped unit base 2201 extending along the inner rail 1002 in an arc shape. It is in communication with the three ball receiving portions 2202, which are open at the rear and form the general winning opening 2001, and the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. It is provided with a trough 2203 that guides the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 rearward.

The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left side in front view. The three ball receiving portions 2202 are laterally separated from each other and project from the front surface of the unit base 2201. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

The side unit lower 2200 is in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side in front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the side unit upper 2300. The side unit lower 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1112 by the gutter 2203. Then, the game ball guided to the rear of the panel board 1112 is a general winning opening sensor 3015 (see FIG. 125) mounted in the back left lower ball guiding unit 3505 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000. Is detected by and is discharged downward.

[5-8c. On the side unit]
Next, the upper side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 89. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front slightly downward from the vertical center in the upper left of the side unit lower 2200 in a front view in the game area 5a.

The side unit upper 2300 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a shelf portion 2302 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and that extends right and left so that the right end side in front view becomes lower. And are equipped with. The shelf 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002. It can be guided to one side (the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction).

[5-8d. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the right flow path in the center accessory. Further, FIG. 93(a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 93(b) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (a).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly in the center in the front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit and the like provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can. The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006.

The center accessory 2500 includes a flat plate frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the peripheral edge of the opening portion 1112 that largely penetrates back and forth in the center of the panel plate 1112, and from the flange portion 2511 to the front. A frame-like shape that has a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that projects and blocks the entry of game balls into the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening portion 1112. The center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position at a position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so that the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 in the vertical direction on the left side in front view can enter. The warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 on the left side in front view, and the game ball that has flowed through the warp passage 2521 can be discharged, and is directed rearward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 87) that is open as a result, and the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 to the center side in the left-right direction behind the flange portion 2511 and along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510. The guide path 2523 to guide and the game ball guided by the guide path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in front view, and extend left and right along the lower side in the frame of the center part of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a stage 2530 that rolls the supplied game ball in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends in the front view are high and the left and right sides of the part corresponding to the left-right center of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest parts is slightly higher. I have put it out. That is, the stage 2530 is formed in a W shape having a gentle slope. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a slightly elevated portion corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and the fan-shaped central guiding portion 2531 and the central guiding portion 2531 are lowered toward the front and spread slightly to the left and right. And a fan-shaped side guide portion 2532 which is formed at the two lowest parts on both the left and right sides of the fan, and which spreads to the left and right while becoming lower toward the front.

This stage 2530 enters the warp entrance 2520 in the game area 5a in a state where the game board 5 is assembled, and the game balls supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the guideway 2523 are It is discharged forward from either the central guiding portion 2531 or the side guiding portion 2532 of the stage 2530 and is returned (recirculated) back into the game area 5a. Further, the stage 2530 has the first starting port 2002 located directly below the central guiding portion 2531 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled, and when the gaming ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 into the game area 5a. , With a very high probability of being received in the first starting port 2002.

As shown in FIG. 92, the center accessory 2500 has an upper right portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward substantially vertically from the right end in front view at the upper side of the center base 2510 to approximately the center in the vertical direction. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled from the hanging wall portion 2512a and the lower end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a, the front peripheral wall is slightly lowered toward the inner periphery of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000). An upper right lateral wall portion 2512b in which a part of the portion 2512 extends to the right and a lower right wall portion in which a portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right lateral wall portion to approximately the same height as the stage 2530. 2512c and a lower right lateral wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends to the left so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the lower right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the upper right wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and an upper right distribution space 2541 through which game balls can be distributed, and an upper right distribution space 2541. A right flow passage 2542 through which the game ball can flow downward on the right side of the right lower hanging wall portion 2512c in communication with the circulation space 2541, and a game ball formed below the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d that communicates with the right flow passage 2542. It has a lower right distribution space 2543 that can be distributed and can communicate with the game area 5a. The upper right distribution space 2541, the right circulation passage 2542, and the lower right distribution space 2543 form a right hitting game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

The upper right distribution space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size in which the vertical and horizontal dimensions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be flowed down along a free path. The right flow passage 2542 is bent so that the vicinity of the lower end portion which vertically extends downward is bent to extend obliquely lower left in the front view, and the width in the left-right direction is set to be a passage slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls can be made to flow down in a single line up and down.

The lower right distribution space 2543 extends leftward from immediately below the portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542 so that the left end side in front view becomes lower, and then opens to the left with a second attacker passage 2543a. A discharge passage 2543b that is in communication with the right end of the two attacker passage 2543a when viewed from the front and extends downward, and a lower end of the discharge passage 2543b that penetrates the flange portion 2511 so that the game balls can pass therethrough, and is opened rearward. And a two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose vertical dimension is about twice the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b has a left and right dimension outside the game ball. The width of the passage is slightly wider than the diameter. This lower right distribution space 2543 is a state in which the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543a is in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the first start opening 2002 and the first start opening 2002 are the left side in the front view of the start opening unit 2100. It opens to the left at a height between the winning opening 2005 and the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second outlet 2543c opening at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b and returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being discarded.

The upper right distribution space 2541 is generally open at the front side, and is a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b at the rear substantially vertical half portion. It is closed by part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed at the front by a flat transparent front right decorative plate 2544 extending from the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c to the right in front view, and at the back is the right hanging wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right distribution space 2543 is closed by a flat transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 that extends downward from the front end position of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d, and the rear lower right lateral wall 2543. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

The center character 2500 includes a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 that protrude into the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 and extend in a direction perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game balls. In the right flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 are alternately projected at predetermined intervals from the mutually facing surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 with respect to the flow direction of the game balls. The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542 are such that the deceleration ribs 2546 are on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side, and the intervals between the deceleration ribs 2546 are substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the vertically extending right flow passage 2542, the game balls always flow in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to acceleration due to gravity.

On the other hand, in the lower right distribution space 2543, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 are alternately projected at predetermined intervals from the surfaces of the lower right decoration plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other in the distribution direction of the game balls. .. The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right distribution space 2543 have a spacing between the deceleration ribs 2546 between the lower right decoration plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. There is. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. With these, even in the lower right distribution space 2543, the game balls always flow in a zigzag manner, the distribution speed of the game balls is attenuated, and the distribution speed of the game balls is prevented from becoming too fast.

In the present embodiment, the upper right distribution space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening 2004, and the lower right distribution space 2543 is provided with the second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped.

More specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a to the right in front view, and one gaming ball. It is formed so that it can pass vertically only. A gate sensor 2547 for detecting passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003. The gate portion 2003 is arranged slightly leftward when viewed from the front with respect to immediately below the hitting portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 are projected below the gate portion 2003 from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 that closes the substantially lower half behind the upper right circulation space 2541. Is equipped with. More specifically, the center acupuncture object 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 is formed in a container shape with the upper side and the rear opening opened at the upper end, and directly below the general winning opening 2001. With the ball receiving member 2548 formed such that the second starting port 2004 opens leftward on the left side surface in front view, and the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511 around the axis where the lower end extends back and forth. A second starting port door member 2549 that is rotatably mounted and that closes the second starting port 2004 so that it can be opened and closed, and a second starting port door member 2549 that is mounted on the rear surface of the flange portion 2511 to open and close. A starting opening solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 142) and a second starting opening sensor 2551 for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004 are provided.

The general winning opening 2001 of the center character 2500 is opened right below the gate portion 2003 in a right direction when viewed from the front and is large enough to receive only one game ball. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided rearward from the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center accessory 2500 to the right in front view.

The second starting opening 2004 is opened right below the general winning opening 2001 toward the left in a front view, and is opened leftward by rotating the second starting opening door member 2549 counterclockwise in a front view. Then, the game ball can be accepted. The outer shape of the second starting opening door member 2549 in front view is a base circle that constitutes the lower portion, and two sides that extend from one point outside the base circle so as to contact the base circle. It is formed in a so-called "drop-like shape" such as that constituted by and and is rotatably attached at the center of the base circle.

In a normal state of the second starting port 2004, the starting port solenoid 2550 is not energized, and the second starting port door member 2549 is in an upright state in which the front end side is positioned substantially directly above the base circle. , The second starting opening door member 2549 is closed so that the game ball cannot be received. Then, when the starting opening solenoid 2550 is energized in accordance with the result of the ordinary drawing that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2003, the front end side of the second starting opening door member 2549 moves to the left in front view. Then, the second starting opening door member 2549 is rotated, and the rotation is stopped when the tip end side is slightly higher. As a result, the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be received. When the second starting opening door member 2549 is rotated and opened, the tip of the second starting opening door member 2549 is substantially in line with the vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, then detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, and discharged downward.

The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right circulation space 2543 so as to open upward. More specifically, the second upper special winning opening 2006a that constitutes the second special winning opening 2006 is opened upward at the right end in the front view in the second attacker passage 2543a, and is also the second large winning opening. The second lower special winning opening 2006b constituting 2006 is opened upward in the front left and lower side of the second upper special winning opening 2006a in the second attacker passage 2543a. The second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are formed such that the left and right widths are within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The center accessory 2500 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the center base 2510 so that the second upper special winning opening 2006a that opens upward can be opened and closed, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511. It is attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 and a flat plate-shaped second upper special winning opening door member 2552 that is protruded more frontward to close the second upper special winning opening 2006a and is inclined so that the left end side in front view becomes lower. The second upper special winning opening door member 2552 is opened and closed to drive the second upper attacker solenoid 2553, and the second upper special winning opening 2006a detects a game ball received in the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554 (FIG. 142). ), and the front end of the front end of the flange portion 2511 is slidably supported by the center base 2510 so as to be able to open and close the second lower special winning opening 2006b that opens upward. Also attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 and the flat lower second prize winning opening door member 2555 that is inclined to project forward and closes the second prize winning opening 2006b so that the left end side when viewed from the front is lowered. The second lower big prize hole sensor 2557 which detects the game ball received in the second lower big prize hole 2006b and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556 which opens and closes the second lower big prize hole door member 2555 (see FIG. 142). See) and.

The center accessory 2500 extends in the left-right direction across the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The flat plate-like transition plate portion 2558 that inclines so that the left end side in the view becomes low and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and also has a second lower large size. The flat discharge plate portion 2559 extends in the left-right direction from the left end of the winning opening 2006b in a front view to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a so that the left end side becomes lower and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And are equipped with. The cross plate portion 2558 is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is within a range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The discharge plate portion 2559 is formed such that the left and right lengths are within the range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on the respective sides of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is set up. In the second attacker passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 93, from the upstream side of the flow of the game balls, the first reduction rib 2546a, the second reduction rib 2546b, the third reduction rib 2546c, the fourth reduction rib 2546d, Fifth reduction ribs 2546e, sixth reduction ribs 2546f, seventh reduction ribs 2546g, eighth reduction ribs 2546h, ninth reduction ribs 2546i, and tenth reduction ribs 2546j, and ten reduction ribs 2546 are provided, The odd-numbered reduction ribs 2546 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the even-numbered reduction ribs 2546 are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j and the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is arranged slightly to the right of the left end in front view of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is arranged on the left side of the left end of the second upper special winning opening 2006a when viewed from the front and near the right end of the crossing plate portion 2558. The third deceleration rib 2546c is arranged substantially at the center of the cross plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is arranged near the left end of the crossing plate portion 2558 on the right side of the right end of the second lower special winning opening 2006b in a front view. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is arranged on the left side of the right end of the second lower winning port 2006 in front view. The 6th deceleration rib 2546f is arrange|positioned at the front view right side of the center of the 2nd lower special winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction. The 7th deceleration rib 2546g is arrange|positioned in the left direction of the center of the 2nd lower special winning opening 2006b left-right direction at the front view. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is arranged on the right side of the left end of the second lower winning port 2006b in front view. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end in front view of the second lower winning port 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the emission plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is arranged substantially at the center of the emission plate portion 2559 in the left-right direction.

Among the first speed reduction ribs 2546a to the tenth speed reduction ribs 2546j, odd-numbered speed reduction ribs 2546 from the first speed reduction rib 2546a to the ninth speed reduction rib 2546i are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The deceleration rib 2546 of 2 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Further, among the first speed reduction ribs 2546a to the tenth speed reduction ribs 2546j, even-numbered speed reduction ribs 2546 from the second speed reduction rib 2546b to the tenth speed reduction rib 2546j are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545. The even-numbered reduction ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the vicinity of the ceiling (see FIG. 93(a)).

Of the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second deceleration rib 2546b closest to the left end of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b in front view, respectively. As shown in FIG. 93A, the eighth deceleration rib 2546h has a lower end on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper special winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower special winning opening door member 2555). From the upper surface) of the other deceleration rib 2546 to the upper side. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h have the same distance as the outer diameter of the game ball from the front end left end of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b, respectively. , Are formed so as to be separated from each other.

Thereby, when the second upper special winning opening 2006a or the second lower special winning opening 2006b shifts from the open state in which the game ball can be received to the closed state in which the game ball cannot be received, the second upper special winning opening slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower special winning opening door member 2555, the front end left end of the second upper special winning opening 2006a or the front lower end of the second lower special winning opening 2006b, and the second deceleration rib 2546b. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) in which a game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth reduction rib 2546h.

In the state where the second upper special winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower special winning opening door member 2555 project forward and close the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b, The second upper special winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower special winning opening door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surfaces of the second upper special winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower special winning opening door member 2555 and the lower ends of the second reduction ribs 2546b and the eighth reduction rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls that are narrower than the above and are circulating (rolling) on the upper surfaces of the second upper special winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower special winning opening door member 2555 are the second reduction rib 2546b and the eighth reduction rib 2546h. Always comes into contact with, and a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

The center accessory 2500, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, is located on the right side in a front view from the substantial center of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a (the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000). ), a space having a width that allows only one game ball to flow is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven to the right in the front view rather than the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the center in the game area 5a is set. A game ball can be circulated in the right hitting game area 2540 on the right side in the front view of the accessory 2500.

In the assembled state on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the left and lower sides of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game ball driven into the game area 5a flows downward through various routes by contacting the plurality of obstacle nails.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. 94 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like as seen from the back.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, has a box shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage unit 2000, and a lock attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in front view inside the back box 3010 for discharging the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit for discharging the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500, which is attached near the front end of the lower right corner in the front case inside the back box 3010. 3035.

One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 to the bottom inside the back box 3010, and then the center in the left-right direction along the bottom. After being guided to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500 to the left in the front view along the bottom of the back box 3010, It is discharged from the vicinity of the center of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction onto the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 above the opening 3010a on the left side in rear view and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. The upper relay board 3040 relaying the connection with the upper left decoration board 3253, the upper relay board cover 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped production drive board box 3042 rotatably attached around an axis extending left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and a peripheral control board 1510 housed in the production drive board box 3042. A performance drive board 3043 that drives each drive motor or a decoration board based on a control command, a main control board 1310 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the lower right corner in rear view, each winning port sensor, each solenoid, etc. And a panel relay board cover 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 which is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Rear lower movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, upper back left movable production unit 3200 attached on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and the rear box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper mounted on the rear box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is open to the front and penetrates the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat-plate-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that projects rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. And two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the outside in the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b as viewed from the rear and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch 3010d is formed by notching from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center of the right side of the rear view in the up-down direction, and the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

Although not described in detail, the back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back left middle decoration unit]
Next, the back left middle decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is attached near the front end in the back box 3010 on the left side when viewed from the front, upward from the center in the vertical direction. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 has a translucent unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3051 and imitates three-dimensionally the "middle tile" of mahjong. A translucent back left middle decoration body 3052, and a back left middle decoration board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decoration body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; Equipped with.

In the back left middle decoration unit 3050, the LEDs of the back left middle decoration substrate 3053 can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the back left middle decoration body 3052 can be illuminated and decorated.

[5-9c. Movable production unit behind the bottom]
Next, the back lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. FIG. 99(a) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 99(b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit seen from the back. FIG. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower back movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 100(b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower back rear movable effect unit for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit, which is disassembled and seen from the front with the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-bottom rear second decorative body, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the first decorative body after rear lowering and the second decorative body after rear lowering as seen from behind. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the drive system of the rear lower rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 104(b) shows that the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-bottom rear second decorative body are rotated together from the normal state. FIG. 3C is a front view of the second decorative surface after the back underside with the second decorative surface facing the front, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the state in which is moved to a moving end on the left side in front view. Further, FIG. 105(d) is a state in which FIG. 104(c) shows that the first rear decorative body and the second rear decorative body are rotated together so that the first decorative surface of the first rear decorative body is exposed. It is a front view of the state which turned to the front, and (e) rotates the back under-rear first decoration body from the state of (d), and opens the back under-rear first decoration body and the back under-rear second decoration body. FIG. 7 is a front view of a state in which the second decorative surface of the first rear-under-the-back decoration body and the second decorative surface of the second rear-under-the-back decoration body are directed to the front.

The rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back under-rear movable production unit 3100 is supported by one back side underneath and is supported so as to be hinge-rotatable coaxially with respect to an axis extending vertically, and a back under side first decorative body 3110 and a back under side. The rear second decorative body 3120, the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body are attached so as to be hinge-rotatably, and each of them can be separately driven to rotate, and a rotary drive unit 3130. Is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and includes a slide unit 3150 that is mounted in the back box 3010, and a lower back fixed decorative body 3160 that is mounted on the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

The backside lower first decorative body 3110 includes a first decorative surface 3111 and a second decorative surface 3112, which are arranged to face each other and have different decorations, and have translucency. 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 are supported so as to face each other, and a thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 and a first decorative body 3113 are attached to the display screen and The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from the one decorative surface 3111, and one of the four vertically extending sides of the rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 that is in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 is outward. The first ornament between the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112, and the two first hinge portions 3115 protruding in the vertical direction and supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. A rear lower first decorative substrate (not shown) mounted in the main body 3113 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides thereof.

The first decorative surface 3111 of the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from within the frame. On the second decorative surface 3112 of the first lower back decorative body 3110, a decoration in which the left half of the letter "Sacred" is applied is formed. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect movie) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

The two first hinge portions 3115 are vertically separated from each other and are coaxially attached. These first hinge portions 3115 are rotatably supported by the second hinge portions 3124 of the second lower back decorative body 3120. The backside-under-first rear decorative substrate can cause the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 to emit light by appropriately emitting LEDs on both surfaces.

The lower back second decorative body 3120 has a translucent first decorative surface 3121 and a second decorative surface 3122 which are arranged back to back and have different decorations from each other, and the first decorative surface. 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 are supported so as to face each other, and a thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body main body 3123, and four vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body main bodies 3123. Of the two sides, the two first hinge portions 3115 of the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 protruding outward from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3122 are rotated about an axis extending vertically. Three second hinge portions 3124 which can be supported and are vertically spaced apart from each other, and a decorative body which projects downward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124. The support shaft 3125, the second decorative body side operation gear 3126 mounted on the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 mounted on the lower surface of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the decorative body support shaft 3125. The second detection piece 3128 extending outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the device and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 are mounted in the second decorative body 3123 and a plurality of LEDs are provided on both surfaces. And a rear second rear decorative substrate (not shown) on which is mounted.

On the first decorative surface 3121 of the second lower back decorative body 3120, the decoration with the vertically written "Tenritsu" is formed. On the second decorative surface 3122 of the second lower back decorative body 3120, a decoration in which the right half of the letter "Holy" is applied is formed. The second decorative body main body 3123 of the back lower back second decoration body 3120 is formed to have a substantially beam-like size with the first decorative body main body 3113 of the back lower back first decoration body 3110. That is, the outer dimensions of the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second back lower back decorative body 3120 are different. They are formed to have substantially the same size.

The three second hinge portions 3124 of the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 are vertically spaced apart from each other and are coaxially attached to each other. The back-back rear first decorative body is located between the second hinge portions 3124. The first hinge portion 3115 of 3110 is located and hinged to each other so as to be rotatable. As a result, the back-under-the-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-the-second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state in which the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other by the hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface between them. It is possible to rotate (hinge rotation) between the open state in which the 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are substantially on the same plane. Then, in a state in which the back-under-the-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-the-second second decorative body 3120 are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 sandwich the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 from each other, and are left and right. It becomes a state that they are lined up, and the decorations of each are united, and the word "Holy" appears. In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 have respective first decorative surfaces 3111, 3111 in the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120. 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are provided with a corresponding decoration, and when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, The one hinge part 3115 and the second hinge part 3124 are made inconspicuous.

The decoration support shaft 3125 has a rotation transmitting member 3132 of the rotary drive unit 3130 for rotating the back decoration first decoration body 3110 at the upper end independently of the back decoration second decoration body 3120. Is inserted. The ornament support shaft 3125 has a rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and a bearing member 3127 at the lower end supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the rotary drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% of the height of the first decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122. More specifically, the length is 80% to 90%. As a result, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 is provided and the heavy first back body 3110 or the like is decentered on one side extending in the vertical direction and the hinge can be rotated, the first rear body 311 can be rotated. It is possible to prevent the decorative body 3110 and the like (the decorative body support shaft 3125) from falling over.

As shown in FIG. 102, the second ornament body-side operation gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a projecting from the gear teeth at one location on the outer circumference so that it cannot rotate once. The second under-back second decorative substrate of the under-back second decorative body 3120 can cause the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 to emit light by appropriately emitting LEDs on both sides.

The rotary drive unit 3130 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is a rotary drive unit base that is rotatably supported by the slide unit 3150 in a box shape having an open front side and is slidably attached to the slide unit 3150. 3131, a cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a that is rotatably supported by the rotary drive unit base 3131 and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the ornament support shaft 3125, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a and is underneath. One of the connecting portion 3132b attached to the lower portion of the rear first ornamental body 3110, the first ornamental body-side operating gear 3132c and the first ornamental body-side operating gear 3132c formed over a half circumference on the outer periphery of the lower end portion of the sleeve portion 3132a. And a rotation transmission member 3132 having a first detection piece 3132d extending outward from the terminal end.

In addition, the rotary drive unit 3130 includes a spur gear-shaped first drive gear 3133 that meshes with the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a rear lower rear drive motor that drives the first drive gear 3133 to rotate. 3134, a first drive motor bracket 3135 in which the rear lower back first drive motor 3134 is mounted and mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and a second decorative body side operation gear 3126 of the rear lower back second decorative body 3120. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3136, a back lower back second drive motor 3137 that rotationally drives the second drive gear 3136, and a back lower back second drive motor 3137 are attached to the rotary drive unit base 3131. And a second drive motor bracket 3138 attached thereto.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138, and can detect the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132, and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. And a second rotation detection sensor 3140 which is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and is capable of detecting the second detection piece 3128 of the rear lower back second decorative body 3120.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the back lower back first decorative substrate, the back lower back second decorative substrate, the back lower back first drive motor 3134, A rotation drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection between the back bottom rear second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and the second rotation detection sensor 3140, and the back bottom rear relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150. , Further equipped.

The rotary drive unit 3130 includes a flat plate-shaped unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a that is attached to the lower surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131, and extends long left and right, and a rack gear. And a rack member 3143 having a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front surface of 3143a.

The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a main part 3131a in which the decorative body support shaft 3125, the back lower back first drive motor 3134, the back lower back second drive motor 3137, and the like are housed. And a sub-portion 3131b that is a substantially cubic shape having a height that is approximately half the height of the main portion 3131a and that is arranged on the left side of the main portion 3131a when viewed from the front and that houses the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. The main portion 3131a and the sub portion 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 is provided with a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131c and a lower bearing portion 3131d, which are notched toward the rear and are open at the front end side, on the top plate portion and the bottom plate portion of the main portion 3131a. .. The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates vertically and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmission member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is recessed from the upper side to the lower side and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the second lower back second decorative body 3120 is inserted. The open front ends of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d are closed by a unit cover 3142.

The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the right side of the ornament support shaft 3125 in a front view via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The rear lower rear second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position to the left of the ornament support shaft 3125 in a front view, via the second drive motor bracket 3138.

The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 rotationally drives the first drive gear 3133 to rotate together with the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 meshing with the first drive gear 3133. The first rear decorative body 3110 can be rotated via the back side. On the other hand, the rear lower back second drive motor 3137 rotates the second drive gear 3136 to cause the second decorative body side operation gear 3126 at the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 meshing with the second drive gear 3136 to The second decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body supporting shaft 3125 under the back side.

As shown in FIG. 100, the slide unit 3150 of the rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and the box-shaped unit base 3151 whose front and upper sides are open, and the upper portion inside the unit base 3151. The slide guide 3152 is mounted on the front surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 and extends left and right, and the slide guide 3152 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward in the center of the unit base 3151 in the horizontal direction. The transmission gear member that has a pinion gear 3153a that meshes with the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 and a driven gear 3153b that rotates integrally with the pinion gear 3153a and that has a spur gear-shaped driven gear 3153b that has a larger diameter than the pinion gear 3153a. 3153, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 that meshes with the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, a back lower rear third drive motor 3155 that is rotationally driven and attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151, A slide detection sensor 3156 that is mounted in the unit base 3151 and detects the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a unit base that closes approximately the lower half of the front open portion of the unit base 3151. A horizontally long flat plate-shaped slide cover 3157 attached to the front end of 3151, and a lower back relay substrate 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 and relaying the connection between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the rotation drive unit relay substrate 3141; Equipped with.

The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotary drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The rear lower rear third drive motor 3155 rotationally drives the drive gear 3154, thereby rotationally driving the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshed with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. With the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 meshing with the rotary drive unit 3130, the rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Next, the operation of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104(a), the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 has the rotary drive unit 3130 positioned at the right end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions by the slide unit 3150 in a normal state. ing. Further, in a normal state, after the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, The first decorative surface 3111 (display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In this normal state, the back lower back first decoration body 3110 and the back lower back second decoration body 3120 are positioned on the right side in front view with respect to the axis of the hinge rotation (the decoration body supporting shaft 3125) extending vertically. doing. Further, in a normal state, the side of the first rear decorative body 3110 and the second rear rear decorative body 3120 opposite to the side of the decorative body supporting shaft 3125 rotatably supported by the hinge is the decorative body. The whole is rotated so that it is located in front of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although not shown in detail, in a normal state, the back lower back first decoration body 3110 and the back lower back second decoration body 3120 rotate about 20 degrees in a clockwise direction in a plan view.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 103, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. Further, in a normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotary drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 is in a state in which the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. Has become. Further, in a normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the ornament support shaft 3125 of the second back lower back ornament 3120 is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

Further, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 and the like, in the state in which it is assembled to the game board 5, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 facing the front (front) of the back lower rear movable decorative body unit 3100. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and to the right in front view, and in the lower right corner in front view in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized. Further, in this normal state, as described above, the right side of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are located in front of the center of the hinge rotation, and thus the sub liquid crystal display device. The display screen of 3114 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100 so as to face the vertical line passing through the center of the game area 5a.

In this normal state, the second rear drive second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is used to drive the second rear drive second drive motor 3137, the second decorative body side operation gear 3126, and the decorative body support shaft 3125 to move the second rear lower back. When the second underside rear second decorative body 3120 is rotated clockwise (160 degrees) in a plan view so that the second decorative surface 3122 facing the rear side of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, the backside underside is closed. The back underside which is located in front of the rear second decorative body 3120 is pressed by the back underside second decorative body 3120 to rotate together, and the backside under which the "heavenly fortune" decoration is applied The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 faces the front (see FIG. 104(b)). In addition, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, which is facing the front in the normal state, faces the rear and is invisible to the player. From this state, neither the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 nor the rear rear lower decorative body 3120 can be further rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view.

In the state of FIG. 104(b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmitting member 3132 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back lower side is in a state detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139. The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125, which rotates integrally with the second decoration 3120, is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the third rear drive motor 3155 under the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143. Through the 3143a, the rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid to the left end position in front view together with the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. In a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the left end position when viewed from the front in the assembled state on the game board 5, the axis line extending vertically of the hinge rotation (the center line of the ornament support shaft 3125) is It substantially coincides with the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

FIG. 104(c) shows a state in which the state of FIG. 104(b) is slid to the left end position in front view. Further, FIG. 105(d) shows the state shown in FIG. 104(a) in which the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmission member are driven by driving the rear lower back first drive motor 3134 while moving to the left end position in front view. Through the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c of 3132 and the connecting portion 3132b, the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction in plan view and the rear lower rear decorative body is shown. From the state in which the first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of 3110 is directed directly in front, or from the state of FIG. 104(c), the first under-back rear decorative body 3110 is driven by driving the under-back rear driving motor 3134. By rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise in a plan view, the second back-under-decoration second decoration body 3120 is rotated together with the back-under-rear first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-rear first decoration body 3110 first. The state where one decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed directly in front is shown.

Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 104(c), by driving the rear lower back second drive motor 3137, the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in plan view, or FIG. In the state of (d), when the back lower back first drive motor 3134 drives the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 to rotate 180 degrees in the clockwise direction in plan view, as shown in FIG. 105(e). From the state in which the second decorative surface 3112 of the first rear decorative body 3110 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second rear decorative body 3120 face each other and are folded, the hinge is rotated to perform the rear rear operation. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 under the back side are opened, and the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side to face the front.

In the state of FIG. 105(e), as compared with the case where the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 310 are closed by being overlapped with each other, By arranging the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back-under-the-back second decorative body 3120 side by side, the surface of the decoration formed by the back-under-the-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-the-second second decorative body 3120 is formed. The size is twice as large, and it is possible to make the player noticeable in the game area 5a and strongly attract the player's attention, and to surprise the player by the appearance of a large decoration. Further, in the state of FIG. 105(e), the decorations on the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120 are integrated, and The decoration will be visible. In addition, in the 1st hinge part 3115 and the 2nd hinge part 3124 of the 1st back decoration 3110 and the 2nd back decoration 3120, the 1st decoration surface 3111,3121 and the 2nd decoration surface 3112,3122 are shown. A decoration corresponding to the applied decoration is applied, and when the back lower back first decoration body 3110 and the back lower back second decoration body 3120 are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character "Holy" can be visually recognized by the player in a good state.

As shown in the figure, the integral decoration formed by the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back-under-first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-second decorative body 3120 includes “Sacred” with “ A cutout decoration 3170 such as "one" is formed. This cutout decoration 3170 is a decoration obtained by cutting out a part of one character or a pattern, and on the upper side of the cutout decoration 3170, a back upper left first decorative body 3210 of a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 described later. When the cutout decoration 3260 in which the decoration of the fixed decoration member 3211 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3222 of the upper left second decoration body 3220 are arranged side by side is located, the entire "Sparrow" character is completed. Yes (see Figure 134).

As described above, according to the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other in the closed state, and When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of are arranged side by side and opened, the surface of the decoration by the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is enlarged (expanded) in the front view game area 5a. In addition, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which are closed and cannot be seen from the player side, are opened to be seen from the player side. More specifically, the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In this state (see FIG. 105( d )), when the back-under-the-back first decorative body 3110 is rotated and arranged side by side on the front side of the back-under-the-second second decorative body 3120, the back-under-the-first decorative body is initially set. The decoration region, which was only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110, extends to the left and becomes two first decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 and the rear lower back second decorative body 3120. The decoration area is doubled, and the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been visible until now, can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 105(e)). Alternatively, in a state in which the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 is directed forward (see FIG. 104(c)). If the second under-back second decorative body 3120 is rotated and arranged side by side on the right side of the back-under-first decorative body 3110 in a front view, only the first decorative surface 3121 of the under-back second decorative body 3120 is initially provided. The second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the first back decorative body 3110 and the second rear decorative body 3120 are doubled so that the existing decorative area extends to the right. At the same time, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen so far, can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 105(e)). In this way, by opening the back-under-the-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-the-back second decoration body 3120 from the closed state, the decoration range by the back-under-the-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-the-back second decoration body 3120 Can be expanded and the decoration can be changed, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be increased to the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120. It is possible to strongly attract and entertain the expanded decoration by the back-under-the-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-the-second second decorative body 3120, and to make the player think that there is something good. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in a state in which the back-under-the-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-the-back second decoration body 3120 are closed to overlap each other, the back-under-the-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-the-back second decoration body 3120 are combined together. When it is rotated to, the hinges of the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 and the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated around one vertically extending side of the hinge rotatably attached. In this state, when the surface (rear surface) that was facing rearward is rotated so as to face forward, the overall positions of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 become the central axes of the hinge rotation. It will be sandwiched and moved to the opposite position. More specifically, the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In the state (see FIGS. 104(a) and 105(d)), when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, The entire 3110 and the rear-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 move to the left in the front view, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the rear-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 faces forward (FIG. 104(b) and (See (c)). On the other hand, in a state in which the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 is directed forward (FIG. 104(b)). And (c)), when the back-under-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-back second decoration body 3120 are rotated together, the back-under-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-back second decoration body 3120 The entire body moves to the right when viewed from the front, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 faces forward (see FIGS. 104(a) and 105(d)). As a result, it is possible to move the area of the decoration by the back-bottom first decorative body 3110 or the back-bottom second decorative body 3120 in the front-view game area 5a, and change the decoration visible from the player side. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-under-the-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-the-back second decoration body 3120. It is possible to entertain the movement and decoration of the 3120 and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in a state in which the back-under-the-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-the-back second decoration body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, one of the back-under-the-back first decoration body 3110 or the back-under-the-back second decoration body 3120 In either case, the first decorative body 3110 after the backing is rotated and the first decorative body 3110 after the backing is rotated and the second decorative body 3120 after the backing is rotated together. Since the surface of the second decorative body 3120 that is visible from the player side starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation, whether the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 open or not. It is difficult to know whether or not they rotate together, and the player can be excited and excited depending on which operation is performed, and the player's expectation can be increased. Also, with respect to the decoration that is visible in the initial state, the player can open and close the back-under-first first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-second second decorative body 3120 together. Since the change in the decoration that can be visually recognized from the side is different, the player can enjoy the change in the decoration in various patterns, and the various effects can prevent the player from getting tired.

As described above, the back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is provided with different decorations by hinge-rotating the back-bottom back first decoration body 3110 and the back-bottom back second decoration body 3120. The decorative surface 3111, 3121 or the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 can be turned to the front, and the slide unit 3150 slides the back-under-back first decoration body 3110 and the back-under-back second decoration body 3120 in the left-right direction. Therefore, various effects can be presented to the player.

In addition, in the back-behind back movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (a position eccentric from the center of gravity) of two sides extending vertically of the quadrangular outer shape in the back-behind back second decorative body 3120. The upper end portion and the lower end portion of the ornamental body support shaft 3125 extending downward coaxially with the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the rotary drive unit 3130. It is supported, and is rotatably supported at two positions vertically separated from each other. Therefore, since the decoration support shaft 3125 is projected from the position eccentric to the center of gravity of the back lower back first decoration body 3110 and the back lower back second decoration body 3120, the decoration support shaft 3125 is located above the decoration support shaft 3125. Even if an unbalanced load that tilts the decorative body support shaft 3125 acts due to the weight of the attached rear lower back decorative body 3110 and the attached rear lower back second decorative body 3120, the decorative body support shaft 3125 is less likely to tilt. The decoration support shaft 3125 can be supported straight to rotate the back-under-back first decoration 3110 and the back-under-back second decoration 3120. In other words, since the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the ornament support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the ornament Since the support shaft 3125 is hard to incline, the weight of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the weight of the rear lower rear second decorative body 3120, which are attached to each other so as to be hinge-rotatably attached to each other, may be coaxial with the axis of the hinge rotation. It can be rotatably supported without any problem.

[5-9d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. 106A is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit seen from the back. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 109(a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 109(b) shows the back upper left first ornament and the back upper left second ornament in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view shown in the state where it moved to the position of the right end in the front view, and (c) shows the state in which the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body are expanded from the state of (b). It is a front view.

The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the left end in front view to the vicinity of the center. The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 extends in the front view top and bottom of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 whose front view has a quadrangular shape and a predetermined decoration is applied to the front surface. The upper back left second decorative body 3220 and the upper back left first decorative body 3210 are mounted so that the hinge can be rotated on the right side and the two surfaces facing back are provided with different decorations. The rear upper left second decorative body 3220 is rotationally driven by a rotation drive unit 3230, and the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rear upper left second decorative body 3220 are slid in the left-right direction together with the rotary drive unit 3230. And a slide unit 3240 mounted inside the back box 3010.

The back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 includes a plate-shaped fixed decorative member 3211 having a translucent property with a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a front end of the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view. So as to cover the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the cylindrical first hinge portion 3212, which is attached to the axially extending vertically from the side and is coaxially spaced apart vertically. A first decorative body base 3213 that is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and projects above the fixed decorative member 3211; and is attached between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. The upper left first decorative substrate 3214 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage and the upper surface of the first decorative body base 3213 are connected to each other and are L-shaped in side view, and from the left end of the first decorative body base 3213. A connecting portion 3215 extending to the right of the right end, a rack gear 3216 formed on the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending left and right, and extending forward from the vicinity of the left end in front view of the connecting portion 3215. And a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3217.
Equipped with.

The fixed decorative member 3211 of the upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a slightly vertically long quadrangle when viewed from the front. In the fixed decorative member 3211, the length of the side extending to the left and right is the same as the side extending to the left and right of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 of the back lower back movable effect unit 3100. The length is the same, and the length of the vertically extending side is shorter than the length of the vertically extending side of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120. On the fixed decorative member 3211, a decoration in which the left half of the character "sparrow" is applied is formed. As shown in FIG. 109(c), in the present embodiment, with respect to the character "sparrow", the lower part of the "one" portion is discontinued from the upper side to the lower side.

The three first hinge portions 3212 are provided at both upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions on the upper side from the center in the vertical direction. Further, the three first hinge portions 3212 project rightward and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view. A rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the first decoration base 3213 on the front surface of a portion protruding above the fixed decoration member 3211. The slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connecting portion 3215 on the rear surface of the vertically extending portion in the L-shape in side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

The back upper left first decorative body 3210 can cause the fixed decorative member 3211 to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214 to emit light.

The back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 includes a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a quadrangular outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the surface, and a back surface of the first decorative member 3221. A second decorative member 3222 having a light-transmitting property, which is attached to a surface of the first decorative member 3221 and faces the surface of the first decorative member 3221 different from the first decorative member 3221; Two second hinge portions 3223, which project outward from the vertically extending side of one of the two and are rotatably attached to the first hinge portion 3212 of the left upper first decorative body 3210, and two A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-shaped operation gear 3225 attached to an upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member. And a second upper decorative substrate (not shown) on the back, which is attached between 3221 and the second decorative member 3222 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both surfaces.

The first decorative member 3221 of the upper left second decorative body 3220 is formed with a decoration on the surface of which "Dokun" is applied. The second decoration member 3222 has a decoration in which the right half of the character “sparrow” is applied to the surface facing the surface of the first decoration member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 is located on the left side of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the left upper first decorative body 3210 when viewed from the front, so that the second decorative member 3222 can be recognized as the character “sparrow”. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 is a cutout decoration 3260 in which the lower part of the “one” part is cut off from the upper side with respect to the character “sparrow”. Under this, the decorations (cutout decorations) of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 and the rear rear lower second decoration body 3120 in the rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character "sparrow" is completed. Since the cutout decoration 3260 on the side of the upper left movable effect unit 3200 occupies most of the characters “Sparrow”, it can be recognized as the character “Sparrow” even if the lower part is cut out.

The two second hinge portions 3223 project rightward and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing forward. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated from each other, and are respectively provided at positions closer to the center from the upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the upper left first decorative body 3210. The operation gear 3225 is attached so as to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the second upper hinge portion 3223. The operating gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotary drive unit 3230.

The back upper left second decorative body 3220 can cause the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 to perform light emission decoration by appropriately emitting light from the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative substrate (not shown). ..

The rotary drive unit 3230 of the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a space between the rotary drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decorative body base 3213 of the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rotary drive base 3231. A rotary drive cover 3232 formed and attached to the upper side of the rotary drive base 3231; and an operating gear 3225 of the upper left second decorative body 3220 that is rotatably attached between the rotary drive cover 3232 and the rotary drive base 3231. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear (not shown) that meshes with the transmission gear 3233, and a rear upper left first drive motor that is rotationally driven to be attached to the upper surface of the rotary drive cover 3232. 3235, and a rotation detection sensor (not shown) that is mounted between the rotation drive base 3231 and the rotation drive cover 3232 and detects the rotation position of the drive gear.

The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the upper left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece extending outward, and the rotation detection sensor detects this detection piece to detect the rotational position of the drive gear, and the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, Also, the rotational position of the upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected through the operation gear 3225.

This rotary drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left first drive motor 3235 to hinge-rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 via the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operating gear 3225. You can

The slide unit 3240 of the rear left upper movable effect unit 3200 is slidably attached to a horizontally long unit base 3241 attached to the inside of the back box 3010, a horizontally long slide rail 3242 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241, and a slide rail 3242. A slider 3243 on which the connecting portion 3215 of the left upper decorative body 3210 is attached to the front surface, and a base cover 3244 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241 so that a space is formed between the slider 3243 and the unit base 3241. A rear upper left second drive motor 3245 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotation shaft penetrates the base cover 3244 and projects between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241; A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3246 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3245, a small-diameter first transmission gear 3247a that meshes with the drive gear 3246, and a large-diameter second transmission gear 3247b that integrally rotates with the first transmission gear 3247a. A transmission gear member 3247 rotatably mounted between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and a second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247 are meshed with the left upper first decorative body 3210. Of the pinion gear 3248 which is engaged with the rack gear 3216 and is rotatably attached between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and the detection piece 3217 of the left upper first decorative body 3210 which is attached to the base cover 3244. And a slide detection sensor 3249.

In addition, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the front view left side in front of the base cover 3244, and the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214, the back upper left second decorative substrate, the back upper left first drive motor 3235, the rotation detection sensor, The back upper left second drive motor 3245, the back upper left relay substrate 3250 that relays the connection between the slide detection sensor 3249 and the performance drive substrate 3043, and the back upper left relay substrate 3250 that covers the front surface of the base cover 3244. A board cover 3251 attached to the front surface, a back upper left decoration base 3252 attached to the front surface of the board cover 3251, and a back upper left decoration board 3253 attached to the front surface of the back upper left decoration base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The rear upper left decorative body 3254 is provided on the front surface of the rear upper left decorative base 3252 so as to cover the front of the rear upper left decorative substrate 3253 and has a translucent rear upper left decorative body 3254 on which a predetermined decoration is formed.

When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the back upper left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 moves the back upper left first decorative body 3210 back through the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. It can be slid in the left-right direction together with the left second decorative body 3220 and the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the LED on the rear upper left decoration substrate 3253 is appropriately made to emit light, so that the rear upper left decoration 3254 can be illuminated and decorated.

Next, the operation of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 is arranged so that the back-up left second decorative body 3220 covers the front surface of the back-up left first decorative body 3210 as shown in FIG. The left second decorative body 3220 is in a state of being folded to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 side by the rotary drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in the state where it was. Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, the rotation detection sensor (not shown) also detects the detection piece of the drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of the second upper back left decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the detection piece 3217 of the upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

In a normal state, the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rear upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the rear left middle decorative unit 3050 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the player side From this state, it is invisible (see FIG. 81 and the like).

In the normal state, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the second drive motor 3245 on the back side of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear is rotated. When the back upper left first decoration 3210 slides rightward in front view together with the back upper left second decoration 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 meshing with 3248, and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 109(b)). In this state, when assembled on the game board 5, the axis of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that extends in the vertical direction and allows hinge rotation is the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. And the upper left first decorative body 3210 is in a state visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 133).

Then, in a state in which the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the right end in front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotary drive unit 3230 interposes the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in plan view, the back upper left second decorative body 3220, which is folded and covers the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210, expands. The hinges are rotated to the state where they are arranged side by side on the right side of the upper left first decorative body 3210 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 109(c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side, so that the size is about twice as large as the normal state, so that it stands out in the game area 5a. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player.

In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are aligned side by side to face the front, and the respective decorations are integrated. Then, the decoration of the character "Sparrow" will be visible. The first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 have decorations applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222, respectively. Corresponding decoration is applied, and when the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is opened from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, the first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 can be made inconspicuous. This allows the player to visually recognize the character "sparrow" in good condition.

In addition, the decoration of the character "sparrow" that can be visually recognized as a unit is cut off from the position above the lowermost part "1" from the lower side to the lower left decorative body 3210 and the upper back. Being integrated with the decorations on the second back decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 of the rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decorative body 3220. Then, the character "sparrow" is in a perfect state (see FIG. 134).

In this way, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back-up left first decoration body 3210 and the back-up left second decoration body 3220 in the left-right direction, and extends the back-up left second decoration body 3220 vertically. By rotating the hinge about the axis, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be folded so as to cover the front surface, or the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be unfolded so as to be aligned with the right side in front view. Therefore, various effects can be presented to the player.

[5-9e. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110(a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 110(b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit seen from the back. FIG. 111(a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 111(b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported by a back right fixed decoration 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front surface and a back right fixed decoration 3310 slidably in the left and right directions. A decorated frame-shaped back right movable decoration 3320, and a back right movable decoration 3320 are slidably moved in the left-right direction to be mounted in the back box 3010, and a back left fixed decoration 3310 is mounted on the front surface. And a back left drive unit 3330.

The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape in a front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is attached to the rear side of the fixed side decorative member 3311 and the fixed side decorative member 3311 that is three-dimensionally decorated and has translucency, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. And a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312. As shown in the figure, the fixed-side decoration member 3311 is partially formed with a decoration of a "flame" tile. In this rear left fixed decorative body 3310, the fixed side decorative member 3311 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the rear left fixed decorative substrate 3312 to emit light.

The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long quadrangle having a shape in front view that is substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable-side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a translucent frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 attached to the rear surface of the movable-side decorative member 3321. And a frame-shaped movable base 3323 mounted on the rear side of the decorative frame 3322, and a back left movable decoration mounted between the movable base 3323 and the decorative frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3324.

The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The lower end side of the movable base 3323 protrudes below the movable side decoration member 3321 and the decoration frame 3322, and the protruding portion is attached by the back left drive unit 3330 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U-shape so as to follow a portion of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 to the right of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. By illuminating the LED on the back left movable decorative substrate 3324, the movable side decorative member 3321 can be illuminated and decorated.

The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3331 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the unit base 3331, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be slid horizontally. The attached slide guide 3332 extending in the left-right direction, the back left drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 such that the rotation shaft extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 is attached. A rod-shaped actuating arm (not shown) that is attached and whose tip side is connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320, and a slide detection sensor 3335 that detects the rotational position of the actuating arm and is attached to the unit base 3331. And a rear left fixed decorative board 3312, a rear left movable decorative board 3324, a rear left drive motor 3333, and a rear left that relays the connection between the slide detection sensor 3335 and the performance drive board 3043, which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331. And a relay board 3336.

In the unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330, the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is attached in front of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side in front view. The slide guide 3332 is attached to the lower end of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 in rear view. The actuating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end in rear view of the lower side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 at the front end side. Although not shown in the drawings, the actuating arm has a slit formed at its tip and penetrating forward and backward and extending in the longitudinal direction thereof. A guide pin protruding rearward from near the lower right corner of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 in rear view is slidably inserted into the slit.

Next, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 has the back left movable decorative body 3320 positioned behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 and is almost invisible from the front, as shown in FIG. 111(a). It is in a state. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located in the invisible position invisible. In this normal state, the slide detection sensor 3335 detects an operation arm (not shown). In a normal state, when assembled on the game board 5, a part of the right end of the rear left fixed decorative body arranged on the front side in front view faces the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the rear left side. The front left side portion of the fixed ornament can be seen from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120 of the rear lower movable effect unit 3100. ing.

In this normal state, when the actuating arm is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the actuating arm is moved. The actuating arm pushes rightward in front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides straight rightward in front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right side portion of the frame-shaped back left fixed decorative body 3320 is left substantially from the front side left side, when the rear left fixed decorative body 3310 is located from the rear side to the right side, the sliding movement to the right is stopped. As a result, the portion of the frame-shaped back left movable decoration 3320 that is on the right side of the left side is located on the right side of the back left fixed decoration 3310 and can be viewed from the front (see FIG. 111(b)). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the appearance position visible from the player side.

When the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid to the right and positioned at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is passed through the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the player side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. In addition to being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the rear can be viewed through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect movie) is displayed in the display area directly behind the back left movable decorative body 3320, the player can see the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. It is possible to make an illusion that a liquid crystal display device is mounted inside. As a result, the player can be illusion that there are two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the left and right sides of the first decorative surface 3111 of the rear-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 of the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100.

[5-9f. Movable production unit behind the scenes]
Next, the back inside middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 123. FIG. 112(a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 112(b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit seen from the back. FIG. 113(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 113(b) is the disassembly of the back-up middle movable production unit for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 114(a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 114(b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit seen from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 117(a) is an explanatory view showing the driving configuration of the back upper middle decoration unit from the front, and FIG. 117(b) is a sectional view taken along the line GG in (a). FIG. 118(a) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, and FIG. 118(b) is a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative body units of the back upper middle decorative body unit are half open outward. FIG. 4C is a front view showing a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit are completely opened outward.

Also, FIG. 119(a) is a perspective view of the back-and-middle drive unit of the back-and-middle-moving effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 120(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main structure and seen from the front, and FIG. 120(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit for each main structure and rear view. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 121(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back middle drive unit disassembled from the back middle drive unit, and FIG. 121(b) is an exploded rear back middle drive unit of the back middle drive unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive system of the rear upper middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the back inside moving effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 123(b) is a front view showing the back inside moving effect unit in the back inside moving effect unit in a lowered state. ..

The back-and-middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the right end. As shown in FIG. 113, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 and the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 which are openably and closably mounted. Via the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 having the back upper middle second decorative body 3412, the rotary connecting member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410, and the rotary connecting member 3430. Back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is mounted rotatably and rotatably and is mounted in the back box 3010, and the upper right rear decoration is mounted on the front surface of the rear middle drive unit 3440. A unit 3480 and a back-and-center relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the back-and-center drive unit 3440 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 114, FIG. 115, etc., the back inside middle decoration unit 3410 of the inside back inside movable effect unit 3400 is a pair of back inside middle first decorations which are given a predetermined decoration on the front surface and have translucency. 3411, a pair of back inside-middle second decorations 3412 arranged behind the pair of back inside middle first decorations 3411 and having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a pair of back inside middle first decorations 3412. A pair of translucent flat plate-shaped slide bases 3413 that are respectively attached to the rear surfaces of the body 3411 and a pair of slide bases 3413 that are attached to the rear surfaces of the pair of slide bases 3413 and have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof. Back top middle first decoration board 3414, back top middle second decoration board 3415 attached to the rear surface of back top middle second decoration body 3412 and mounting a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and back top middle second decoration board Substrate cover 3416, which covers the rear surface of the back cover 3415 and is attached to the rear surface of the second upper middle decorative body 3412, and a board cover so as to form a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated. A flat plate-shaped slider cover 3417 attached to the rear side of 3416 and an ornamental unit base 3418 attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417 are provided.

In addition, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is mounted on the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418, and the motor base 3419 is mounted on the rear surface of the motor base 3419, and the rotation shaft protrudes from the front surface of the motor base 3419. Back upper middle drive motor 3420, and spur gear-shaped first drive gear attached to the rotation shaft of the rear upper first drive motor 3420 and arranged between the motor base 3419 and the ornamental unit base 3418. 3421, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 that is rotatably attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 so as to mesh with the first drive gear 3421 and have a front end protruding forward of the decorative body unit base. , And a first pinion gear 3423 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3422 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the ornamental unit base 3418.

Further, the back middle decoration unit 3410 is a mounting boss for mounting one of the pair of slide bases 3413 through the rack gear 3424a which is meshed with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends left and right, and the slider cover 3417. The first slider 3424, which has 3424b and is slidably mounted in the left-right direction between the slider cover 3417 and the ornamental unit base 3418, and the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwiches the first pinion gear 3423. On the opposite side, a rack gear 3425a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that penetrates the slider cover 3417 and mounts the remaining (other) of the pair of slide bases 3413 are provided. A second slider 3425 slidably mounted in the left-right direction between the slider cover 3417 and the ornamental unit base 3418, and a sliding position of the second slider 3425 attached to the ornamental unit base 3418 from the rear side. And a slide detection sensor 3426 for detecting the.

The pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 of the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3410 has a shape in a front view, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of a quadrangle extending to the left and right bulges outward in a semi-circular arc, The opposite side edge is recessed inward in a semi-circular arc, and the part depressed in the semi-circular arc is a concave portion 3411a. In addition, in the pair of back-side middle first decorative bodies 3411, the outer periphery excluding the end sides where the concave portions 3411a that are recessed inward in a semi-circular shape are formed to extend rearward in a plate shape. The pair of upper back first decorations 3411 are attached such that the edges on which the recesses 3411a are formed face each other. In addition, the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are formed in a translucent milky white color as a whole, and the front side of one of the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 has a head side of a “dragon”. The decorations are formed on the front surface of the remaining (other) back upper middle first decoration body 3411 so that the decorations on the tail side of the "dragon" have metallic luster.

The back inside middle second decorative body 3412 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back inside middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Has been done. The back upper middle second decoration 3412 has a circular central bulging portion 3412a which is inserted in the recess 3411a of the back upper middle first ornament 3411 and bulges forward, and the left and right sides of the central decoration portion 3412a. A circular center horizontal decorative portion 3412b is formed on both sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, and a circular central horizontal decorative portion 3412b is formed on both left and right outer sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b. An intermediate decorative portion 3412c and a circular end decorative portion 3412d, which are formed on the left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c near the left and right ends, respectively, and have a diameter larger than that of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c. The back middle second decorative body 3412 is formed in a translucent milky white color as a whole, and the outer periphery of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d on the front surface. A linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed on. This back upper middle second decoration 3412 is decorated to remind the player of the "dot stick" of "Mahjong".

Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411. Mounted on the edge. As a result, by assembling the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 is assembled between the slide base 3413 and the portion forming the front surface of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411. A space in which the second decorative body 3412, the second upper back middle decorative substrate 3415, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted is formed. Further, each of the pair of slide bases 3413 has a slit 3413a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction. Of the pair of slide bases 3413, one of the slide bases 3413 has a slit 3413a formed on the side closer to the upper side, and the remaining slide bases 3413 have the slit 3413a formed on the side closer to the lower side. Further, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a translucent milky white color.

The pair of back top middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the pair of back top middle second decorative substrate 3415 are white substrates on the front surface (entire surface). This makes it easy to reflect/diffuse light and makes the substrate inconspicuous. Since the back inside middle first decoration body 3414 is attached to the slide base 3413 which is away from the portion forming the front surface of the inside back inside first decoration body 3411, the light from the LED is in the back side inside. Since the light irradiation range is expanded by the time it reaches the portion forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, even if the number of LEDs is small, it is possible to make the entire first decorative body 3411 inside the back evenly emit light. it can. On the other hand, the back upper middle second decorative substrate 3415 can light-emit the whole of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412, and also, the central decorative portion 3412a and the central lateral decorative portion of the rear upper middle second decorative body 3412. 3412b, the intermediate decoration portion 3412c, and the end decoration portion 3412d can be independently luminescently decorated.

The board cover 3416 is provided with mounting bosses 3416a protruding rearward from the left and right ends on the rear surface in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the slits 3413a of the slide base 3413. A rear end of the mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 which penetrates the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413 is mounted on the slider cover 3417. Further, the mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 relatively slides in the left and right direction inside the slit 3413a via a bush 3427 rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

The slider cover 3417 extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction, and the first slit 3417a in which the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted, and the slider cover 3417 extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The second slider 3425 has a second slit 3417b into which the mounting boss 3425a of the cage 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The second slit 3417b is formed near the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

The first pinion gear 3423 is arranged slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 117). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged side by side from the left end in front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have their front ends penetrating the first slits 3417a of the slider cover 3417 and projecting forward, and are decorated on the head side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is arranged so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged side by side from the right end in front view project forward. The two attachment bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have their front ends penetrating the second slits 3417b of the slider cover 3417 and projecting forward, and the first decoration on the back middle with the decoration on the tail side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. In addition, the second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that projects upward from the upper portion near the right end in front view in a flat plate shape. The detection piece 3425c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

Next, the operation of the back-and-top middle decorative body unit 3410 in the back-and-top middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In a normal state, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is closed as shown in FIG. 118(a) and the like, with the edges of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 on the recessed portion 3411a side contacting each other. There is. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the back middle second decorative body 3412 bulges forward through the circular opening formed by the recessed portion 3411a, and the other parts of the back middle second decorative body 3412 extend from the front. Invisible.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 117(a), the front end left end portion of the first slider 3424 and the front end right end portion of the second slider 2425 are in the left-right direction in the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410. It is located near the center. The detection piece 3425c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In a normal state (closed state), when the central decoration portion 3412a is light-emitted by the second upper and lower decoration substrate 3415, the player can see the decoration reminiscent of the “thousand sticks” of “Mahjong”. Further, in a normal state, when the whole of the back inside middle second decoration body 3412 is light-emitted and decorated by the back inside middle second decoration substrate 3415, the back inside middle first decoration covering the front of the back inside middle decoration body 3412. The body 3411 can be entirely illuminated. Further, in a normal state, when the LED of the back inside first decoration 3414 is made to emit light, the light is formed in white on the rear surface of the back inside middle second decoration 3415 and the back inside middle first decoration 3414. It is possible to reflect/diffuse on the front surface or the like, and to light-emit the outer periphery or the like of the first upper and lower decorations 3411.

When the first pinion gear 3423 is rotationally driven from the normal state in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422 by the first drive motor 3420 on the back side. The rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 which are meshed with the pinion gear 3423 cause the first slider 3424 to slide leftward in front view and the second slider 3425 rightward in front view. Slide to move. As a result, the first upper back decorative body 3411 with the decoration of the head of the "dragon" attached via the mounting boss 3424b of the first slider 3424 slides leftward in front view, and The upper side of the "dragon" attached to the tail side of the "dragon" attached via the attachment boss 3425b of the second slider 3425. The first decorative body 3411 is slid to the right in front view. The first decorative bodies 3411 are slid and opened in the directions in which they are separated from each other.

When the pair of back upper middle first decorations 3411 are slid in a direction away from each other, the pair of back upper middle first decorations 3411 is inserted between the end sides on the concave portion 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle first decorations 3411. A part of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 arranged at the rear of the 3411 comes to face the front. Then, in a state in which the central lateral decorative portion 3412b of the back inside middle second decorative body 3412 comes to face forward from between the pair of back inside middle first decorative bodies 3411, the inside back first driving motor 3420. The rotation drive of is temporarily stopped. In this state (intermediate open state), as shown in FIG. 117(b), from the space between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the center decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 and four The central lateral decoration portion 3412b is in a state of facing the front. In this state, when the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b are light-emitted by the second upper and lower decorative substrate 3415, the player can see the decoration that is reminiscent of the "five-point stick" of "Mahjong". it can.

From this state, when the pair of back inside middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in a direction in which they are separated from each other by the back inside first driving motor 3420, and the rotation drive is stopped in the most separated state, FIG. 118 ( As shown in c), substantially the entire second upper back middle decorative body 3412 faces the front side between the pair of first upper back middle decorative bodies 3411 (fully open state). In this state, all of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back inside middle second decorative body 3412 face forward, and the back inside middle second decorative substrate When the central ornamental portion 3412a, the central lateral ornamental portion 3412b, the intermediate ornamental portion 3412c, and the edge ornamental portion 3412d are light-emitted by the 3415, the player can see the ornament reminiscent of the "multipoint stick" of "Mahjong". it can. Further, in this state, the back inside first decorative substrate 3414 and the back inside middle second decorative substrate 3415 cause the back inside middle first decorative body 3411 and the back inside middle second decorative body 3412 to emit light as a whole. be able to.

Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the back inside moving effect unit 3400 is attached to the center of the back inside decoration unit 3410 in the longitudinal direction at the rear surface of the decoration unit base 3418, and above the back inside driving unit 3440. The intermediate rotation unit 3460 includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 rotatably attached to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connection bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461b of the rotary unit base 3461 of the back middle rotation unit 3460.

Next, the back inside driving unit 3440 of the back inside moving effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120 and the like, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 can rotate the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 rotatably and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 can rotate on the front side. A unit base 3441 attached to the back box 3010, a base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back middle rotation unit 3460, and a base cover. A rear upper middle second drive motor 3443 mounted on the front surface of the shaft 3442 and having a rotary shaft penetrating the base cover 3442 and protruding rearward, and a flat shaft mounted on the rotary shaft of the rear upper middle second drive motor 3443. Gear-shaped second drive gear 3444, large-diameter, spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear 3445a that meshes with second drive gear 3444, and small-diameter, spur-gear-shaped small-diameter transmission gear that rotates integrally with large-diameter transmission gear 3445a. A second transmission gear 3445 rotatably attached to the base cover 3442, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a that meshes with the small diameter transmission gear 3445b of the second transmission gear 3445, and a gear portion 3446a. It has a columnar drive pin 3446b protruding rearward from the rear surface, and an up-and-down drive gear 3446 rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 and a drive pin 3446b of the up-and-down drive gear 3446 are inserted to the rear side. It has an arcuate slit 3447a protruding to the rear side, and is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the second drive gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the elevating drive gear 3446, and the base. It is provided with a plate-shaped gear cover 3447 that rotatably mounts a second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and a lift drive gear 3446 in cooperation with the cover 3442.

Further, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441, and includes a rotation detection sensor 3448 that detects a rotation position of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, a unit base 3441, and a back-up middle rotation unit 3460. An assist spring 3449 that is attached between the back middle middle decoration unit 3410 and the back middle middle rotation unit 3460 in the upward direction, and an assist spring 3449 that extends entirely in the form of a belt and extends in the longitudinal direction. An assist arm 3450 having an assist slit 3450a and a base end side rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441, and an assist arm 3450 rotatably pressing the assist arm 3450 from the front to the unit base 3441 side. And an arm retainer 3451 attached to the front surface of the.

As shown in FIG. 121, etc., the back-and-center driving unit 3440 includes a bearing portion 3461a rotatably attached to a unit base 3441 and a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a predetermined direction. Drive slit 3461b into which the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c into which the connecting bush 3432 of the rotary connection member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of the assist arm 3450 protruding rearward. It has a cylindrical assist pin 3461d to be inserted into 3450a and rotates so as to close a shallow box-shaped rotating unit base 3461 whose rear is opened and an open rear side of the rotating unit base 3461. And a rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461.

In addition, the back inside middle rotation unit 3460 includes a back inside middle third drive motor 3461 attached to the front surface of the rotation unit base 3461 such that the rotation shaft projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461. The third drive gear 3464, which is a spur gear attached to the rotation shaft of the third drive motor 3463, is meshed with the third drive gear 3464 and is rotatable by the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. A spur gear-shaped drive pinion gear 3465 that is attached to the drive pinion gear 3465 and a rod-shaped transmission rack gear that meshes with the drive pinion gear 3465 and is slidably attached in a predetermined direction between the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. 3466 engages with the transmission rack gear 3466 and is rotatably attached by the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 at a position coaxial with the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461, and the rotation connection member 3430 is connected to the front surface. And a driven pinion gear 3467 in the form of a spur gear to which the rear end of the base 3431 is attached.

Further, the back middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467 and the rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 is inserted inside. A cylindrical bush 3469 having a flange that is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450, and a bush 3469 attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotary unit base 3461 and coming out of the assist pin 3461d. And a retaining cap 3470 for preventing the above.

The unit base 3441 of the drive unit 3440 for driving in the back is formed in such a shape that the upper part of the left side of a vertically extending quadrangle in a front view protrudes to the left. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably attaching the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back middle rotation unit 3460. A rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 at the upper end of the front surface near the right end in front view, and an assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end in front view.

The back upper second drive motor 3463 is attached near the upper end of the front surface of the base cover 3442. The lift drive gear 3446, to which the rotational drive of the back second drive motor 3473 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445, is located at a substantially vertical position of the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442. Is rotatably attached (see FIG. 122).

The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same plane without rattling by being pressed against the unit base 3441 side by the arm presser 3451.

The rotation unit base 3461 of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 extends to the left and right, and a bearing portion 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed at the lower right corner in front view. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461b of the rotary unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends to the left and right along the lower side longer than the transmission rack gear 3466 and slidably accommodates the transmission rack gear 3466. The slide groove 3461e projects upward from the upper right end of the front view to detect rotation. And a detection piece 3461f detected by the sensor.

The rear upper middle drive motor 3463 is attached to the rotation unit base 3461 at substantially the center between the bearing portion 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c. The driven pinion gear 3467 has outer peripheral gear teeth that mesh with the transmission rack gear 3466 only within a range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and does not rotate once. The driven pinion gear 3467 is provided with a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion on the outer circumference where gear teeth are not formed, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

Next, the back upper right decoration unit 3480 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decoration unit 3480 is attached to the front surface of the decoration base 3481 and the decoration base 3481 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3442 at a position in front of the back upper middle second drive motor 3443 in the back upper middle drive unit 3440. A rear right upper decorative board 3482 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a translucent rear upper right decorative body 3483 arranged in front of the rear upper right decorative board 3482 and attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3481. , Are provided.

In the back upper right decoration unit 3480, the LED on the back upper right decoration substrate 3482 is caused to emit light, so that the back upper right decoration body 3483 can be illuminated and decorated. The rear upper right decorative body 3483 of the rear upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled to the game board 5, and the gate portion 2003 in the right hitting distribution space 2541 and the general prize in the right hitting game area 2540 in the front view of the center accessory 2500. It is located between the mouth 2001 and the inside of the upper right circulation space 2541 can be illuminated and decorated from the rear through the transparent game panel 1100.

The inside-rear relay board 3490 of the inside-rear moving effect unit 3400 includes an inside-rear first decoration board 3414, an inside-rear second decoration board 3415, an inside-rear first drive motor 3420, a slide detection sensor 3426, and an inside-rear. A middle second drive motor 3443, a rotation detection sensor 3448, a back upper middle third drive motor 3463, a rotation detection sensor 3468, a back upper right decoration board 3482, and a performance drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510, Are connected.

Next, the operation of the back-and-middle moving effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the back-and-middle driving unit 3440. In a normal state, the back inside middle movable effect unit 3400 is in a state in which the back inside middle decorative body unit 3410 extends left and right so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal as shown in FIG. It is located slightly lower than the upper side of the unit base 3441 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. In this normal state, the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are in contact with each other and closed.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 122, the back middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is driven by the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. It is located at the bottom of the inside. In this state, the back middle rotating unit 3460 is acted on by the weight of the back middle decorating unit 3410 and the like to rotate about the rotation supporting pin 3441a in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. ing. Due to this rotational moment, the drive pin 3446b is pressed to the left side via the drive slit 3461b. Then, when the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevating drive gear 3446 tries to rotate, but the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevating drive gear 3446 and is orthogonal to the direction in which the drive slit 3461b extends. Since it is located lower than the above, the ascending/descending drive gear 3446 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the up-and-down drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end in the drive slit 3461b, the up-and-down drive gear 3446 cannot rotate in the clockwise direction any more, and the back middle rotation unit 3460 cannot be rotated. Is maintained in a normal state, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is locked in a raised state. Further, in this state, since the up-and-down drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotation moment, a load may be applied to the second drive motor 3443 in the back via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. In fact, it is possible to maintain the upper back middle decoration unit 3410 at the rising end even when the second upper back middle drive motor 3443 is not energized.

In a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotation unit base 3461 is located at the moving end away from the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a), and A driven pinion gear 3467 that is meshed with the transmission rack gear 3466 is located near the rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Further, in a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back middle rotation unit 3460 is located above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotary unit base 3461 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 is the base of the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. Further, in a normal state, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the frame of the front view center accessory 2500 includes a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 which are horizontally extended and closed in the assembled state on the game board 5. Is located above the display screen of (1) so that the player can visually recognize it (see FIG. 81 and the like).

From this normal state, if the raising/lowering drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 by the second upper middle drive motor 3443, The drive pin 3446b of the drive gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise in the drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b revolves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the drive pin 3446b presses the inside of the drive slit 3461b to the left, and the back middle rotation unit 3460 is rotationally supported via the drive slit 3461b. The pin 3441a rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front.

When the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located in the left side in front view above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a). The 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connecting member 3430 that passes through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, since the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 revolves in the counterclockwise direction in front view about the rotation support pin 3441a, the assist pin 3461d moves the assist arm 3450 in the counterclockwise direction in front view. While rotating, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the tip side thereof.

Then, when the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state by about 41 degrees in the front view, the rotation of the back upper middle rotation drive motor 3443 is stopped, and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461c. (The driven pinion gear 3467) is positioned below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end (see FIG. 123(b)). In this state, a part of the rotation unit base 3461 abuts on the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d abuts on the tip end side end in the assist slit 3450a. The above-mentioned rotation is restricted.

In the state in which the back upper middle rotating unit 3460 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front and the back upper middle ornamental unit 3410 is located at the descending end, the back upper middle ornament is assembled in the game board 5. The center of the body unit 3410 (the central decoration portion 3412a of the second upper middle decoration body 3412) is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

In a state in which the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is moved to the lower end, the drive pinion gear 3465 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in the front view by the third inner drive motor 3463 through the third drive gear 3464. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides in the slide groove 3461e to the right in the front view. When the transmission rack gear 3466 slides to the right, the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rotational connection attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. Through the connection base 3431 of the member 3430, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 also rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view.

In the back upper middle rotating unit 3460, the back upper middle ornamental unit 3410 can be rotated counterclockwise in the front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the slide groove 3461e in the front view. In the present embodiment, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated about 193 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state. Therefore, in the state in which the upper back middle decorative body unit 3410 is located at the lower end, it is possible to rotate 208 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a front view with respect to the normal state in which it extends horizontally (FIG. 123 ( See b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 123(b), by driving the back inside middle first drive motor 3420 of the back inside middle decorative body unit 3410, the pair of back inside middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in the directions away from each other. It is moved (see FIGS. 138 and 139, etc.).

As described above, the back inside middle movable effect unit 3400 includes the back inside middle decorative body unit 3410 having the pair of back inside middle first decorative body 3411 and the pair of back inside middle second decorative body 3412, and the inside back inside driving unit 3440. In addition to being able to move up and down and rotate, the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 can be opened and closed, and a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, depending on the opening degree of the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411, the "mahjong" expressed by the decoration of the back-up middle second decoration 3412 that faces forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorations Since the score of the "dot bar" can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be increased by the score of the "dot bar".

[5-9 g. Front and back movable production unit]
Next, the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 131. FIG. 124(a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 124(b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit seen from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit other than the back lower front decoration body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 126 is the front lower back movable effect unit other than the back lower front decoration body unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front ornamental body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128 is the rear lower front ornamental unit of the back lower front movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 129 is a front view schematically showing a decorative body unit lifting mechanism in the back lower front movable effect unit. FIG. 130(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit elevating/lowering mechanism when the lower back front decorative body unit is raised, and FIG. 130(b) is an enlarged view of the unit elevating pin portion in (a). FIG. 6C is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the unit lifting pins and the lifting slits by further enlarging FIG. 131(a) is a front view showing the back lower front movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 131(b) is a front view showing a state where the back lower front decorative body unit is lifted from the state of (a), (C) is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is lifted from the state of (b).

The front lower back movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the rear rear lower movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The front lower back movable effect unit 3500 is a front lower back decorative body unit 3501 with a predetermined decoration, and an elevating unit attached to the front of the rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 for moving the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 up and down. 3502, a lower back left decoration unit 3503 attached to the front surface of the left end of the elevating unit 3502 when viewed from the front, a lower back middle decoration unit 3504 attached to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front on the front surface of the elevating unit 3502, A lower back left sphere guiding unit 3505 mounted from the left side to the lower side of the lower back middle decoration unit 3504 on the front surface of the lifting unit 3502, and a lower back front relay substrate 3506 mounted on the rear surface of the lifting unit 3502, Equipped with.

As shown in FIGS. 127, 128, etc., the back under front decoration body unit 3501 of the under under front movable effect unit 3500 is a plate-like shape extending left and right, and different decorations are applied on both sides. The body 3510 and the front lower back front decorative body 3510 are attached to the upper side extending in the left-right direction so that they can be hinge-rotatably attached, and are attached to the elevating unit 3502 so that they can be moved up and down, and the front is decorated on the front side And a second decorative body 3520.

The front lower back decorative body 3510 of the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 is a quadrangular shape in which a front view is elongated in the left and right directions, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front surface thereof. A first front decoration member 3511 having a light property, and a shallow box-like shape that is attached to the rear surface of the first front decoration member 3511 and has a predetermined decoration formed on the rear surface and is open on the front side and has a light-transmitting property. A first back decorative member 3512, a back lower front decorative substrate 3513 mounted between the first back decorative member 3512 and the first front decorative member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides thereof; One back decorative member 3512, two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 protruding obliquely upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with axes extending left and right from the left and right ends in a front view in front view; A decorative body elevating pin 3515 that projects in a cylindrical shape from the right side surface of the member 3512 in a front view to the right and is slidably inserted into a slit 3533a of a decorative body elevating arm 3533 in a second lower back front decorative body 3520 described later. And a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3516 protruding rearward from the right side of the first back decoration member 3512 in front view.

In the back lower front first decorative body 3510, of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in front view is attached slightly leftward from the right end of the first back decorative member 3512 in front view. ing. Although not shown in detail, the first decorative member 3511 of the back lower front decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of “mahjong” “tiles” arranged side by side.

The back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger in left and right and upper and lower than the back lower front first decorative body 3510, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front side of the back lower side. A second decoration member 3521 that is open and has a shallow box shape and has a light-transmitting property; and a lower back front decoration board 3522 attached to the rear surface of the second decoration member 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A front view of a flat plate-shaped substrate cover 3523 that covers the back of the second lower decorative substrate 3522 and is attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, and the upper side extending to the left and right of the second decorative member 3521. Cylindrical shape for attaching the first hinge portion 3514 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 so that the first hinge portion 3514 can be hinge-rotatably protruded obliquely upward and forward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending left and right from the vicinity of both left and right ends. Of the two second hinge portions 3524, and the right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge portion 3524 on the right side in front view of the two second hinge portions 3524, and the left end side is the front side of the lower front front decorative body 3510. A cylindrical hinge shaft 3525 that is inserted from the right side into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in the view, and a front side left side of the back side of the first decorative body 3510 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the second decorative member 3521 in front view. A hinge retainer 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the first hinge portion 3514.

Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 has a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 that is attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 as viewed from the front and has an opening on the right side. A back lower front first drive motor 3528 mounted on the left side surface of the gear base 3527 in a front view so as to project rightward, and a spur gear-shaped mounting on the rotation shaft of the back lower front first drive motor 3528. A first drive gear 3529, a transmission first gear 3530 meshed with the first drive gear 3529 and rotatably attached to a gear base 3527, and a transmission first gear 3530 meshed with the transmission first gear 3530 and rotated by a gear base 3527. A transmission second gear 3531 that is movably attached, a first elevating gear 3532 that is engaged with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably attached to a gear base 3527, and in the left side of the gear base 3527 in front view. A slit that rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532, penetrates in the left-right direction, extends on the axis line passing through the center of rotation, and slidably inserts the ornament elevating pin 3515 of the back lower front first ornament 3510. Of the gear base 3527 so as to cover the decorative body lifting arm 3533 having 3533a, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, and the first lifting gear 3532 in the front view right side. And a flat plate-shaped gear cover 3534 attached to the gear base 3527, the open right end side being closed.

Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the front view left side surface of the second decorative member 3521, and a decorative body up/down detection sensor 3535 capable of detecting the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510. , A sensor cover 3536 attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 as viewed from the front so as to cover the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535, and a slider attachment that extends downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 as viewed from the front. A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 that protrudes rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the right end in rear view in the upper portion of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523 are provided.

In the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative body lifting pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525 and 3526a, the lower back front driving motor 3528, the first driving gear 3529, and the transmission first. A decorative body lifting mechanism in which a gear 3530, a transmission second gear 3531, a first lifting gear 3532, and a decorative body lifting arm 3533 move the first lower back lower decorative body 3510 by hinge rotation with respect to an axis extending left and right to move up and down. It constitutes 3501A.

In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 has a long hole-shaped lifting slit 3540 that is formed in the lower part of the second decorative member 3521 to the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. Is prepared. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the lifting slit 3540 has both ends extending to the left and right formed at the same height, and a portion on the upper side extending to the left and right from the left end in front view to the right. It has a lock protrusion 3540a protruding downward. The lock protrusion 3540a is formed in an arc shape in which the left side in front view is in contact with a line that horizontally extends from the upper end of the left half arc of the lifting slit 3540, and the right side in front view is in the slit for lifting. It is formed in a linear shape that extends obliquely toward the left end of a portion that horizontally extends slightly to the left from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of 3540. The lower side extending to the left and right of the elevating slit 3540 is formed in a shape that follows the upper side so that a substantially constant interval is formed between the lower side and the upper side.

The raising/lowering unit 3502 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 3550 attached to the front surface of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 and the back lower side of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501. A rotation shaft protrudes between the base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 with a gap capable of accommodating a site below the first front decorative body 3510 and the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A lower back front second drive motor 3552 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, and a spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3553 attached to a rotation shaft of the lower back front second drive motor 3552, A second transmission gear 3554 that meshes with the second drive gear 3553 and is rotatably attached by a unit base 3550 and a base cover 3551; and an arc-shaped second elevating gear 3555a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3554. A plate-shaped main body portion 3555b that is substantially semicircular concentric with the arc of the second lifting gear 3555a, a shaft hole 3555c that penetrates at the center of the main body portion 3555b, and is rotatably attached by a unit base 3550 and a base cover 3551; A unit raising/lowering arm 3555 having an arm portion 3555d extending from the main body portion 3555b in a direction away from the second raising/lowering gear 3555a, and an underside front decoration attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d in the unit raising/lowering arm 3555 from the front. A cylindrical unit elevating pin 3556a slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the body unit 3501 and extending from the front end of the unit elevating pin 3556a to the shaft hole 3555c side along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555. A flat plate-shaped connecting piece 3556b, and an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c protruding rearward from the tip of the connecting piece 3556b and having a rear end attached to the front surface of the main body portion 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555, Equipped with.

The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 in front view. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3553a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached so as to rotate about a position near the upper part on the left side from the center of the unit base 3550 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The unit lifting arm 3555 is formed such that the distance from the shaft hole 3555c to the tip of the arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of the second lifting gear 3555a.

The lifting unit 3502 is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3550, and is mounted on the front end of the unit base 3550, which is a unit lifting detection sensor 3557 capable of detecting the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553. A vertically extending slide base 3558, a vertically extending rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 vertically slidably mounted on the front side of the slide base 3558, and vertically slidably mounted on the front side of the intermediate slider 3559. An attachment slider 3560 whose front surface extends vertically and is attached to the slider attachment portion 3537 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is provided.

In this lifting/lowering unit 3502, the back lower front second drive motor 3552, second driving gear 3553, second transmission gear 3554, unit lifting/lowering arm 3555, arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit lifting/lowering pin 3556a), slide base 3558, intermediate slider 3559. , And the mounting slider 3560 constitute a decorative body unit elevating mechanism 3502A for elevating the lower back front decorative body unit 3501.

Further, the elevating unit 3502 has a base end side rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, penetrates forward and backward, extends toward the front end side, and has the guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 inserted therein. A guide arm 3561 having a guide slit 3561a, and a guide bush into which the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is inserted while being slidably inserted from the rear into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561. 3562, a spring base 3563 that is attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and a rear end surface of the guide arm 3561 that is rotatably supported and an arm retainer that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550. 3564, and an assist spring 3565 having both ends attached to the arm presser 3564 and the spring base 3563, respectively, and biasing the ahem presser 3564 and the spring base 3563 toward each other. The guide arm 3561 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at a position closer to the right in the upper left of the front view, and the tip end side extends rightward.

The back lower left decoration unit 3503 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front left upper corner of the unit base 3550, and has a three-dimensional decoration imitating the “mahjong” “tile” on the front. And a lower back left decoration board 3561 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 behind the lower left decoration body 3560 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The lower back left decoration unit 3503 can cause the LED on the lower left back decoration substrate 3561 to emit light as appropriate so that the lower left back decoration body 3560 can be illuminated. The back lower left decoration unit 3503 is located behind the side unit upper 2300 when assembled on the game board 5, and it is possible to light and decorate the vicinity of the side unit upper 2300 in the game area 5a.

The under-rear decoration unit 3504 of the under-rear movable production unit 3500 is attached to a portion on the front side of the base cover 3551 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is translucent on which the decoration of the character "Dokun" is formed. And a back lower middle decoration board 3571 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the back lower middle decoration body 3570 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 can cause the lower back middle decoration body 3570 to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the lower back middle decoration substrate 3571 to emit light. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the side unit lower 2200 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a when assembled in the game board 5.

The back left lower ball guiding unit 3505 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 can guide and discharge the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit lower 2200, by guiding them downward. The back lower left sphere guiding unit 3505 is mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has a transparent passage member 3580 having an open front surface, and a transparent flat plate-like member closing the opened front surface of the passage member 3580. A cover 3581 and a side rear decoration substrate 3582 mounted behind the passage member 3580 on the front surface of the base cover 3551 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 is attached. In addition, the back lower left sphere guiding unit 3505 is located behind the side unit lower 2200 when assembled to the game board 5, and the side unit lower 2200 is controlled by causing the LEDs of the side rear decorative substrate 3582 to appropriately emit light. Can be decorated with luminous.

The back lower front relay substrate 3506 of the front lower back movable effect unit 3500 includes a back lower front first decorative substrate 3513, a back lower front second decorative substrate 3522, a back lower front drive motor 3528, a decorative body up/down detection sensor 3535, The lower back front second drive motor 3552, the unit up/down detection sensor 3557, the lower back left decoration board 3561, the lower back middle decoration board 3571, and the side rear decoration board 3582, and the performance drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is relaying the connection.

Next, the operation of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 131A, etc., the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is in a normal state in which the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 is located at the descending end and the front lower back decorative body unit 3501. The back lower front first decoration 3510 is hinged so as to descend and is positioned in front of the back lower front second decoration 3520. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 faces forward.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 129, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit raising/lowering arm 3555 of the raising/lowering unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555c, and it is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d. The unit elevating pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted in the elevating slit 3540 of the lower front decorative body unit 3501 is located in the elevating slit 3540 near the right end in front view. Further, the guide arm 3561 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state in which the tip extends substantially horizontally with the front end facing rightward and is inserted into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561. The guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end in front view in the guide slit 3561a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit up/down detection sensor 3557.

Although not shown in detail, in a normal state, the decoration body elevating arm 3553 in the front back lower decoration body 3520 of the back lower front decoration body unit 3501 has a distal end extending downward from the center of rotation. The decoration raising/lowering pin 3515 of the back lower front first decoration 3510 inserted in the slit 3533a of the decoration raising/lowering arm 3553 is located at the end of the slit 3533a on the side closer to the rotation center. There is. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the front lower back front decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535 of the front front lower back decoration 3520.

In this normal state, in the assembled state on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a front view and behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front decorative body 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

In a normal state, the unit drive arm 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the second drive motor 3552 on the back side of the lift unit 3502 via the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554. Then, the unit elevating pin 3556a at the tip of the arm portion 3555d revolves in the ascending direction around the shaft hole 3555c. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a presses the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 rises. This front lower back decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the attachment slider 3560 at the right end in front view, and therefore, is straightly raised without tilting.

As the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 to the left in the front view. When the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left side in front view from the lowermost protruding portion of the downwardly projecting lock protrusion 3540a in the ascending/descending slit 3540, the driving of the lower back second drive motor 3552 is stopped. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the drive unit 3502 (the decorative body unit lifting mechanism 3502A) (first rising position). ) State (see FIG. 131(b)).

In this state, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (the unit elevating pin 3556a) is located at the upper right of the rotation center of the unit elevating arm 3555 (the shaft hole 3555c) when viewed from the front. Due to the weight of the front decorative body unit 3501, a rotation moment for rotating the unit elevating arm 3555 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front acts on the tip of the arm portion 3555d. Then, as shown in FIG. 130(c), in the front view left side surface of the lock protrusion 3540a with which the unit elevating pin 3556a on the upper side of the elevating slit 3540 is in contact, a portion on the right side of the abutting portion is, Since the lock protrusion 3540a revolves so as to move downward because it has entered the inside of the boundary line L (indicated by the chain double-dashed line in the figure) of the turning range of the unit lifting pin 3556a, the intruding part The lock projection 3540a (back lower front decorative body unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 so that the lock protrusion 3540a moves outside the boundary line L of the turning range. The rotation moment acting on the elevating pin 3556a is canceled out, and the unit elevating arm 3555 is maintained (locked) in the state of being positioned at the rising end without rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, almost the entire lower back front decorative body unit 3501 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5 has the center accessory 2500 in front view. The state of being positioned in the frame allows the player to favorably see the decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510.

Subsequently, with the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 being positioned at the rising end, by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decoration 3520, the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530. , The transmission second gear 3531 and the first elevating gear 3532, when rotating the decorative body lifting arm 3533 in the clockwise direction in the right side view, the slit 3533a of the decorative body lifting arm 3533 causes the slit 3533a in The decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the inserted lower back front decorative body 3510 is pressed forward, so that the lower side of the lower front front decorative body 3510 moves forward and upward. The lower back front decorative body 3510 hinges around the second hinge portion 3524.

When the decoration raising/lowering arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees clockwise in the right side view, the rotation of the back lower front first drive motor 3528 stops, and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 turns the back lower front second. The decorative body 3520 is positioned above the decorative body 3520 (in the raised position or the open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 that was initially facing forward is in a rearward facing state, and instead is facing rearward and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is facing forward. The second back decoration member 3512 facing the second decoration member 3521 is located above the second decoration member 3521, the front surface thereof is substantially flush with the second decoration member 3521, and faces the front. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the letter "Hwa") (Fig. 131 ( See c)).

In the state in which the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is lifted and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is raised and rotated by the hinge, the center accessory 2500 of the center accessory 2500 is viewed in a front view in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. A substantially lower half of the inside of the frame (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 141).

In this way, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 maintains the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 in the state of being stopped at the rising end position even when the second back lower front drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load that acts on the second drive motor 3552 under the back side. In addition, since the unit lifting pins 3556a that revolve in the ascending direction are locked in the middle, when the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is locked at the rising end position, the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 without causing an unnatural movement such as lowering.

Further, in the front lower back decorative body unit 3501, as an operation of raising the front lower back decorative body 3510, the hinge is rotated about the axis extending to the left and right to raise it, so that it is slid linearly. Compared with the case where the player is allowed to do so, since the part of the back lower front decorative body 3510 seen from the player side is changing every moment, it can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. By opening the back lower front first decorative body 3510 by hinge rotation, the first back decorative member 3512 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 which cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. The second decorative member 3521 can be shown to surprise the player.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141. FIG. 132 shows a state in which the rear-bottom rear first decorative body and the rear-bottom rear second decorative body are rotated together in a normal position in the rear-bottom movable movable production unit of the rear unit so that the second decorative surface faces the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. In FIG. 133, the rear under-rear movable movable unit of the back unit is closed and the back under-rear first decorative body and the back under-rear second decorative body are closed, and the first decorative surface of the back under-rear first decorative body is directed to the front. In the state, it is slid to the center in the left-right direction in the game area, and the back-up left first decoration body and the back-up left second decoration body of the back-up left movable effect unit are slid in the play area in the center in the left-right direction. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 134 shows a state in which the first back-under-back decorative body of the back-back-back movable effect unit is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. With the decorative surface facing the front, the upper left second decorative body of the upper left movable production unit is hinge-rotated and opened to fix the fixed decorative member of the upper left first decorative body and the first of the lower left second decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown with the two decorative members facing the front. FIG. 135 is a state in which the first back-under-back first decorative body of the movable back-under-back movable effect unit is opened by hinge rotation from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown with the decorative surface facing the front.

FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end in front view. FIG. 137 is a front view counterclockwise so as to move the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit in the back unit to the position of the lower end and to extend the back upper middle decorative body unit diagonally downward to the left in front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being rotated in the direction of rotation. 138 is a front view of the game board shown in the state of FIG. 137 in a state where the pair of first and second back upper middle decorative bodies are separated from each other and slid to the position of the half-open intermediate opened state. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board shown in the state of FIG. 138 in which the pair of upper back first decorative bodies are further separated from each other and slid to the fully opened position. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit of the lower back front movable effect unit of the back unit is located at the rising end. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back lower front first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 140 and lifted above the back lower front second decorative body.

In the normal state, the game board 5 of the present embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 mounted on the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIG. 81 and the like. , Which can be seen well from the player side (front side). In this normal state, the hinge-rotatable back first rear decorative body 3110 and the rear rear second decorative body 3120 of the rear rear movable movable unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 are closed and the rear rear first decorative body 3120 is closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 is directed forward so that it can be seen from the player side, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are moved to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 by the hinge rotation. In the folded state in which the upper left second decorative body 3220 is located in front of the fixed decorative member 3211, it is located behind the rear left middle decorative unit 3050 which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. The front side is invisiblely shielded from the player side by the back left middle decoration unit 3050.

Further, in a normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. Thus, a part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 passes through the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and faces slightly forward. Further, in a normal state, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at a rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A part of the front center viewable accessory 2500 is visibly frontward through the frame.

Further, in a normal state, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. In the state of being folded so as to descend to the side, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is a lower end in front view lower than the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as not to face the inside from the frame of the center accessory 2500. Is located in.

This game board 5 is under the back unit 3000 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the back left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emission effect). ..

Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is plan-viewed by the back lower back second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. The second decorative surface 3122 facing the rear is turned to the front by rotating in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 132). At this time, the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3110 which is closed and positioned in front of the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. As a result, the rear-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the rear-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A part of the displayed effect image is obstructed, so that the second decorative body 3120 behind the back side can be made conspicuous, and the “heavenly luck” applied to the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 under the back side. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration of “”, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that something is good.

In addition, as an effect (movable effect) using the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 and the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, in the back-bottom movable effect unit 3100, the back-bottom rear third of the slide unit 3150 is used. By the drive motor 3155, the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the left end position in front view while the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120 are closed, and at the same time, The rear lower back first drive motor 3134 slightly rotates the rear rear lower decorative body 3110 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view to direct the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) to the front. At the same time, in the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240 causes the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 to move back upper left first. The first decorative member 3221 is slid to the right end in front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with the first decorative member 3221 facing the front while being closed with respect to the decorative body 3210 (see FIG. 133).

In the state shown in FIG. 133, an axis line extending vertically for hinge-rotating the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, and the back upper left. The axis line extending vertically for hinge-rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the movable effect unit 3200 is positioned on the same axis, and the left and right of the game area 5a. It almost coincides with the center of the direction. In this state, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are obliquely aligned in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. It is located in front of. As a result, the player can be surprised by the movement of the back side rear first decoration body 3110 to the center side and the appearance of the back side left second decoration body 3220.

Then, in the state in which the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 and the rear upper left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (the state of FIG. 133), the rotary drive unit 3130 in the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The back lower back first decorative body 3110 folded by the back lower back first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in a plan view so as to be opened forward from the back lower rear second decoration body 3120, The rear lower rear first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120 so that the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 thereof are directed to the front side, and the rear upper left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, and the back upper left first The second decorative body 3220 on the back side is arranged on the right side of the decorative body 3210 so that the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 face the front (see FIG. 134).

In the state of FIG. 134, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 which are lined up on the left and right of the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 are lined up on the left and right of the back left movable effect unit 3200. The back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state in which they are vertically aligned and united in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. It covers the front of the display screen. In addition, the back side rear movable artistic unit 3100 of the back side rear movable production unit 3100 and the second back decorative surface 3111, 3121 of the back side rear second decorative body 3120 of the back side back movable production unit 3200. Vertically written characters of "Sparrow" are given to the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 by the respective decorations. It will be visible from the side. As a result, a large ornament appears in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), which has a great impact on the player and gives a chance of a "big hit game" or the like. It is possible to strongly suggest the arrival of the game, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

By the way, in the above description, an effect has been described in which the back-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 of the back-bottom rear movable unit 3100 and the back-up left second decorative body 3220 of the back-up left movable rendering unit 3200 are simultaneously opened. As indicated by 135, only the rear-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 of the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. As a result, the back-behind rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-behind rear second decorative body 3120 of the back-behind back movable effect unit 3100 are first opened by hinge rotation and their second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front. Then, the letters "Holy" will be visible first. At this time, since a cutout decoration 3170 such as "one" is provided on the upper side of the character "Holy", a decoration that becomes a set to complete the cutout decoration 3170 on the upper side for the player. It is possible to recognize that there is (cutout decoration 3260), and whether or not a decoration as a set appears (whether or not the upper left second decorative body 3220 is hinge-rotated and opened) to identify the player. It is possible to increase the excitement and excitement of the player, which can increase the player's expectations.

Further, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid to the appearance position on the right in front view by the back left driving motor 3333 of the back left driving unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decoration body 3320 positioned directly behind the back left fixed decoration body 3310 is located rightward of the back left fixed decoration body 3310 in a front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500. And is visible from the player side (see FIG. 136). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in a region corresponding to the inside of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the rear, the player can see the image. It is possible to make an illusion that the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the figure, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back lower back first decorative body 3110 in the back lower movable production unit 3100. When the adornment 3320 appears, it is illusion that another liquid crystal display device has appeared on the left side so that it can be paired with the first adornment 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) on the back side of the right side, and the left side can be moved. The effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the first back decorative body 3110 can be greatly enjoyed.

Furthermore, as an effect using the back inside middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back inside middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back inside middle drive unit 3440. To the lower end of the back middle middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the tip thereof, and the back middle middle decoration unit 3410 of the back middle middle rotation unit 3460 is driven by the back middle middle decoration unit 3410. The 3410 is rotated to the turning end in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end side raised. (Fig. 137). As a result, the back middle decorating body unit 3410 located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 descends to the central position while rotating, so that the movement of the player moves the back middle decorating body. It is possible to draw attention to the unit 3410 and move the back and middle decoration unit 3410 in a form reminiscent of the "thousand sticks" of "Mahjong". It can enhance the feeling.

Then, as shown in FIG. 137, from the state in which the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end and extends obliquely, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is closed by the back middle first driving motor 3420. The pair of upper back middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to be in an intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 138, the central decorative portion 3412a and the four central horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the second intermediate upper decorative body 3412 are arranged between the pair of first intermediate upper decorative bodies 3411. Since it is in a state of facing forward, it can remind the player of "five-point sticks" of "Mahjong", making it seem that the chance of "big hit game" has increased, The feeling can be further enhanced.

In addition, when the pair of rear upper first drive motors 3420 slides the pair of rear upper first decorative bodies 3411 in a direction further separating from the state of FIG. 138 to bring them into a fully opened state, as shown in FIG. All of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the rear upper middle second decorative body 3412 face forward from between the rear upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. Since it is in the state of being, it is possible to remind the player of the "ten thousand stick" of "Mahjong" and convince the player that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that has been drawn is a "big hit". It is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Further, as an effect using the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, a state in which the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 and is folded. Then, the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is raised from the lower end position to the rising end position by the back lower front second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502. In the state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, almost the entire lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the game is played. The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front decorative body 3510 can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the person side (see FIG. 140). As a result, the lower back front decorative body 3510 rises from the lower side to cover the lower front portion of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the player can be informed of the chance and the expectation for the game can be increased. Can be raised. Although detailed illustration is omitted, since the first front decorative member 3511 of the first lower back decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" "tiles" arranged side by side, Since the front decoration member 3511 rises and becomes visible, the player can enjoy the illusion that he or she is aligning his tiles.

Then, in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (the decorative body lifting mechanism 3501A) is used. , When the back side of the front decorative body 3510 is positioned above the back side of the second decorative body 3520 by rotating the hinge about an axis extending left and right so that the first decoration body 3510 rises, The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 are vertically aligned. In this state, when viewed from the front, the lower half of the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the letter "Hwa") (FIG. 141). See). As a result, the first table decoration member 3511, which is decorated with a plurality of "Mahjong tiles" arranged side by side, is hinged about the axis extending to the left and right, and the letters "Hakuryo" mean "Agari". Because of the appearance of, the player can be confident that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the lottery is a "big hit", and the player can enjoy it by expecting the "big hit game" to occur. Can be raised.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the gaming machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I/O port as input/output device (I/O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 2104 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting opening 2004. 2551, a general winning hole sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning hole 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b and Detection signals from the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are respectively inputted through the main control I/O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting opening solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker solenoid. 2553, and output a drive signal to the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first special symbol memory display device of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I/O port , A second special symbol memory display, a normal symbol display device, a normal symbol memory display device, a game state display device, a round display device, or the like to output a drive signal.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2557, whereas a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate section 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 2104 and the second starting opening sensor 2551 are provided. And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. Further, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game balls are frequently entered, The game balls are frequently detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU issues various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the periphery of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. It is transmitted to the control unit 1511. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game balls, etc., performs a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by the ball feed solenoid 551. A firing control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a game ball in the payout device 830, a ball removing switch for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removing operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 952 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 951 has a built-in micro controller including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I/O port as an I/O device, external WDT (external watch dock timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various kinds of information (game information) about a game from the main control board 1310 and various kinds of commands about payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. It

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out as a prize ball is output to an external terminal board (not shown), and various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 is output to the payout control I/O port. Or output to an external terminal board. This external terminal board is connected to a hall management computer installed at the game store side. Then, the hall management computer grasps the number of game balls actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, thereby determining the player's game and the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1. The payout information of the game ball (so-called payout information) is monitored.

The error LED display is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, the player is informed that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830, and the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate. "Is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, there is a problem in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number " When "5" is displayed, the fact that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is “full” (specifically, it is full with the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number is displayed. When "7" is displayed, it is informed that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is cut off in any portion from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. When is displayed, it is informing that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 332 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. To be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is input to 334 and displayed.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 953 that controls the firing by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding the firing are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to a ball-sending solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger touches the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

Based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, this launch solenoid drive circuit inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle lever 504, as a launch reference pulse. When triggered, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the accepted game ball to the hitting ball launching device 680 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 142, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and the high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the production drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the frame 3, and a color provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door side drive emission data composed of a door side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame 3 side. , Or control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, In addition to that, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the production button pressing sensor 258 of the production operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the speaker 921 provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 2ch surround signal) as sound information are output to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By sending a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the production drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box, The serial input/output port is set to 250 kbps as the bit rate in this embodiment.

This production drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives the game board side lighting/blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

In addition, the production drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[6-4. Performance display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in detail, is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM that stores various data of screens displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. And are equipped with.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command). The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. As the non-resident area transfer data, the screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data is changed in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order of data transfer is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM on the basis of the input screen data to extract the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and this line buffer is stored in this line buffer. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device cannot be ignored. This affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the image RAM having a high access speed and copied, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Therefore, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position where they are arranged on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as “order of sprite superposition”), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are main scans for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. And sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs main scanning, When the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are viewed from the front, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each minute pixel.

[7. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 87, FIG. 92, FIG. 142 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, That is, it is possible to hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow velocity of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) While coming into contact with, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, the center character object passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 on the left and right thereof. Is released backward from either of the. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The sphere has a high probability of being received in the first starting opening 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300 brings it to the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500 that is higher than the highest part. ), and enters into the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and flow while changing the downward direction in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper portion, a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided.

The game ball flowing down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the downstream right distribution passage 2542. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize hole 2006a and the second lower prize hole 2006b that are lined up on the left and right as the second prize hole 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and is lowered into the game area 5a from the left end of the discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view. Is released. The downstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a (discharging plate portion 2559) is opened so that the game ball goes to the first special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first special winning opening 2005 is open. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

The gaming balls flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flow down while the increase of the circulation speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 through the second outlet 2543c without being returned inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. One ordinary random number is obtained from among the above, and the obtained ordinary random number is collated with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform ordinary lottery. When the ordinary lottery result of this ordinary lottery is “normal win” when the time saving control to be described later is not executed, the second starting opening door member 2549 pivots only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second The starting opening 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the ordinary lottery is performed to select whether the "normal win" is "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". When the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is “first ordinary hit”, “second ordinary hit”, or “third ordinary hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second starting door member 2549 is Front view After turning in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. The opening/closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 to prevent the game ball from being received in the second starting port 2004 by turning the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004). Repeat) times. In addition, when the result of the normal lottery of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, the second starting opening 2004 is set to a state in which the game balls can be accepted, and “0.3 seconds” is set for each of the five times. , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "second ordinary winning" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times when the second starting opening 2004 is set in a state in which the game ball can be received. , "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary win", the second starting opening 2004 is set to a state in which the game ball can be accepted. The period is set to "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "second ordinary hit" and "third ordinary" The hit is a hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "first ordinary hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting opening 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbol performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is changed after the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (normal suggestion of a lottery result) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal variation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. It should be noted that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is performed such that the normal fluctuation time is shortened compared to normal (a state in which time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting opening door member 2549 to open the second starting opening 2004 may be changed according to the game state, for example, the time saving control is executed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, until the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested), a new game ball is displayed on the gate unit. After passing 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device, so the variable display start of the ordinary symbol is ended until the variable display of the previous ordinary symbol is finished (the ordinary lottery result I try to put it on hold until the suggestion ends. Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the variable display of the normal symbol can be started. Until the start of variable display of ordinary symbols is suspended. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of up to 4, and if the number is more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. .. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game store side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit") is obtained by obtaining one first special random number from the one special random number and collating the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table. , "Small hit", etc.) is drawn. Then, based on the first special lottery result selected by lottery, the first special lottery result is obtained after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds). The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the first special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball in the first starting opening 2002, "departure", "small hit", "2R probability change big hit", "8R probability change big hit", "8R normal" There is a "big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", which is one of these by comparing the obtained first special random number with the big hit determination table, and further after the big hit game normal (low probability state: this example Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also referred to as probability variation state): about 1/44th in this example) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) over the probability of winning the jackpot with about 1/395 probability. To win big jackpot with probability) (whether it is a probable big hit or not), and to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when at least the first special lottery result is off Whether or not (whether or not it is a big short-time hit) and the period for executing the time-shortening control (the number of time-savings: special symbols (the number of changes of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined. There is. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

In addition, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. By obtaining the second special random number of, and by collating the obtained second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. The second special lottery result is generated. Then, based on the second special lottery result that is selected by lottery, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game balls being received in the second starting opening 2004, "outlier", "2R probability big hit", "2R normal big hit", "4R probability big hit", "5R" Probable variation big hit, "6R certainty variation jackpot", "7R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot 2", "16R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot 3" Which of these is determined by comparing the random number with the jackpot determination table, and further after the jackpot game than normal (low probability state: in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/395) Whether or not to execute probability improvement control (high-probability state (also referred to as probability variation state: in this example, winning the jackpot with a probability of about 1/4) in order to improve the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability)) Whether or not it is a big hit), whether at least the second special lottery result is off, whether to execute the time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual (whether it is a time saving big hit or not) and the time saving control The period (time saving number: special symbol (the number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined.

In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the result of the special lottery, and then the first big winning opening. Any of 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 becomes a state in which a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 while the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout board cause a payout device. A predetermined number of games from 830 (11 in the case where the game balls are received in the first special winning opening 2005, or 15 in the case where the game balls are received in the second large winning opening 2006) The balls are dispensed to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to receive the game balls when the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 can receive the game balls, many games can be played. The balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit (2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit)", the first big winning opening 2005 over a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example) a game ball After the open state in which the game ball can be received is repeated a plurality of times (two times in this example) for opening and closing the game ball in the closed state for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example). That is, when the special lottery result is "small win" or "2R big hit (2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit)", the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened for a short time and the first big winning opening 2005 is played. A ball is made difficult to accept, and an advantageous game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball is generated.

On the other hand, the special lottery results are "4R probability variation big hit", "5R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "7R probability variation jackpot", "8R jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot, 8R regular jackpot)", "10R probability variation jackpot", In the case of "16R probability variation big hit 1", the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example), or the number of the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. An open state in which (7 in this example) game balls can be accepted or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls can be received in the second special winning opening 2006. After that, the first big prize hole 2005 is closed for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example) so that the game ball cannot be received, or the second big prize hole 2006 is kept for a predetermined time (in this example, The open/close pattern (one open/close pattern is called one round) that brings the game ball into the unacceptable closed state for 1.0 second is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 4 times (4 rounds) for "4R certainty variation jackpot", 5 times (5 rounds) for "5R certainty variation jackpot", 16 times (16 rounds) for "16R certainty variation jackpot", etc. Then, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (in this case, a big hit) is generated. That is, the special lottery results are "4R probability variable jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "7R probability variation jackpot", "8R jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot, 8R regular jackpot)", "10R probability variation jackpot", In the case of "16R probability variation big hit 1", by accepting the game ball to the first big prize hole 2005 and the second big prize hole 2006 by controlling the first big prize hole 2005 and the second big prize hole 2006 to be open for a long time. As a result, it becomes easy to generate a big hit that allows the player to win prize balls, so that the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short period of time.

When the result of the special lottery is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example) so that the game ball can be received, and then the predetermined time is reached. The control to put the game ball into the unacceptable closed state for a number of times (2.0 seconds in this example) is repeatedly executed a plurality of times (6 times in this example), or is preset to the second special winning opening 2006. The open/close pattern executed until the number of game balls (10 in this example) is accepted is repeated 16 times (for 16 rounds). In the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, first, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened/closed at a timing at which one game ball can be received in the second big winning opening 2006. Then, after that, the process of controlling the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 2006 is repeated five times at the timing when the two game balls can be received in the second special winning opening 2006. That is, when the special lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit 2", the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time over a plurality of times in one round, but the second big winning opening 2006 It is a big hit that accepts game balls and wins prize balls. Therefore, if the special lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit 2", it becomes possible to accept 11 game balls in excess of 10 which are allowed to be accepted in the second special winning opening 2006 during one round. After opening the two major winning openings 2006 for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example) or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received, From "16R probability variation big hit 1", which repeats the opening and closing pattern for closing the second winning opening 2006 for a predetermined time (1.0 second in this example) in which the game ball cannot be received, a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) It is also possible to win a large number of award balls (By acquiring a large number of 15 award balls per round, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 240 award balls more than the "16R probability variation big 1". it can). In this way, in this example, even when the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than the number of hits of the game balls, and a large amount of prize balls in a short period of time. Since it is possible to win, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game even when a big hit occurs in which the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time.

In addition, as described above, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b of the second big winning opening 2006 have a left-right width within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. While being formed, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are controlled to be open 2.0 seconds after they are closed, so that the left and right directions in the upper part of the center accessory 2500 are controlled. The game ball that has entered the second upper special winning opening 2006a is second while the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are closed by being driven to the right in the front view rather than the center. The second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b can be controlled to be in an open state before the rolling of both the upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is completed, and thereby the second All the game balls that have entered the second upper special winning opening 2006a while the upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are closed are in the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b. It is possible to enter the inside. In addition, in this example, the period from the closed state to the opened state of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is set to 2.0 seconds, whereby the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second It is possible to change the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b from the closed state to the open state in the state where the game ball has entered on each of the second lower special winning opening 2006b. Accordingly, although the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, it is possible to realize the entry of two game balls per round. The period from the closed state to the opened state of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is not limited to the above-mentioned 2.0 seconds, and at least eight rounds of the big hit game are required. After it is started (until the game ball that is received in the second prize hole 2006 in 16 rounds is launched), the ball launching device 680 intermittently continues to hit the game ball into the second attacker passage 2543a. In this case, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b are closed from the closed state in the state where the game ball has entered on each of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b. The period may be such that the open state can be achieved.

In the above example, when the result of the special lottery is "16R probability variation big hit 2", the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example). After that, for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example), the control for putting the game ball into the unacceptable closed state is repeatedly executed a plurality of times (6 times in this example), or to the second special winning opening 2006. Although it is configured to execute an opening/closing pattern that is executed until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received, it is possible to enter more than 10 game balls. The present invention is not limited to this as long as it controls opening and closing of the special winning opening 2006. By providing a plurality of intervals for short-time opening control, or by executing combination of long-time opening control and short-time opening control. Is also feasible. For example, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for 0.6 seconds to receive the game ball, and then closed for 2.0 seconds so that the game ball cannot be received. The two-piece winning control that allows the two major winning openings 2006 to be accepted, and the second major winning opening 2006 that is in an open state in which the gaming balls can be received for 0.6 seconds, and then the gaming balls are played for 1.0 seconds. It is executed by combining one game ball as a non-acceptable closed state with one game ball that can be accepted into the second prize hole 2006 in one round (for example, less than 9 in the second prize hole 2006). In the state in which only one game ball has been entered, the one-piece winning control is executed only once, and the two-piece winning control is executed in other cases). The second special winning opening 2006 may be controlled to be opened and closed so that eleven game balls in excess of one can be entered, or the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds). After entering the state, or after 9 game balls have been accepted into the second prize hole 2006, the second prize hole 2006 is closed for 2.0 seconds so that the game balls cannot be accepted, and then the second prize hole is entered. 1 by repeating the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that opens the special winning opening 2006 for 0.6 seconds to receive the game ball 16 times (for one round) The second special winning opening 2006 may be controlled to be opened/closed so that 11 game balls, which exceed a predetermined maximum number of 11, can be entered during one round.

Further, within the period from the closed state to the open state of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b You may make it provide the blade rolling sensor which can detect the game ball which is rolling, and in this case, the detection by the blade rolling sensor and the second upper big winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning opening. You may make it perform the effect according to the number of the game balls which can enter into the second special winning opening 2006 predicted from the timing of opening 2006b.

If the special lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit 3", the second big winning opening 2006 is a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example) or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of the game. After opening the game ball until the ball is accepted, the opening and closing pattern that makes the game ball into the unacceptable closed state for a predetermined time (1.0 second in this example) for the second special winning opening 2006 7 times (7 rounds), and the game is continued until the second special winning opening 2006 is received for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example) or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls. After opening the ball into an acceptable state (after executing 8 rounds), the second winning hole 2006 is closed for a predetermined period of time (2.0 seconds in this example) so that the game ball cannot be accepted. Then, after opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example) to receive the game ball, a game ball for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example) The opening/closing pattern for closing the state of being unacceptable is repeated eight times (for the remaining eight rounds). In the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 3”, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened/closed at a timing at which the two game balls can be received in the second big winning opening 2006. It is like this. That is, in the first 8 rounds out of the 16 rounds, as in the case where the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 1”, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time to easily obtain the prize ball. In addition to being played, the opening and closing of the second prize hole 2006 is controlled only once in one of the remaining eight rounds, but the game ball is received in the second prize hole 2006 and the prize ball is received. Has generated a jackpot that can be earned.

As described above, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit (2R probability variation big hit, 2R regular big hit)” (opening/closing pattern for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 for a short time) In ), it is practically difficult to enter a game ball into the first big prize hole 2005, and it is not possible to expect to win a prize ball. On the other hand, the special lottery results are "4R probability variation big hit", "5R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "7R probability variation jackpot", "8R jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot, 8R normal jackpot)", "10R probability variation jackpot". , "16R probability variation big hit 1" opening/closing pattern (first big winning opening 2005 or second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be open for a long time, or the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either a predetermined number (7 in this example) of game balls are accepted, or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is accepted into the second special winning opening 2006. If the conditions are satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state) Is possible.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second big winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of “big hit”, almost all the game balls flowing down in the second attacker passage 2543a by right-handing are accepted in the second big winning opening 2006. For example, after the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are opened to allow the game balls to be accepted, the condition of being unacceptable (the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time) Or, it is closed (closed) by filling a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls to the second special winning opening 2006, and then it can be received next. Even when the game ball passes over the second upper special winning opening 2006a until (the interval is opened), the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006a are again opened. By opening 2006b and allowing the game balls to be received, it is possible to reliably receive the game balls that have passed over the second upper special winning opening 2006a in the second closed state in the second lower special winning opening 2006b. Is becoming

In addition, the special lottery results are "4R probability variation big hit", "5R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "7R probability variation jackpot", "8R jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot, 8R regular jackpot)", "10R probability variation jackpot", In the case of "16R probability variation big hit 1" and "16R probability variation big hit 3 first half 8 rounds", the interval between closing the second special winning opening 2006 and opening it again is 1.0 second, and the right Since the increase of the circulation speed of the game ball flowing down in the second attacker passage 2543a by hitting is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546, between the time when the second special winning opening 2006 is closed and the time when it is opened again. It is unlikely that the game ball will pass through the second upper special winning opening 2006a and reach the second lower special winning opening 2006b or between the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b. Almost all the game balls that have flowed down in the second attacker passage 2543a by right hitting will be accepted in the second upper special winning opening 2006a.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, “16R probability variation big hit 3 latter half 8 rounds”, the interval from closing the second special winning opening 2006 to opening it again is 2.0. Since it is set to seconds, it passes over the second upper special winning opening 2006a during the period from the closed state of the second special winning opening 2006 to the opening state thereof again, and the second upper special winning opening 2006b or the second upper winning opening 2006b. There is a high possibility that the game ball will reach between the special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b. That is, when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened again, almost all the game balls flowing down in the second attacker 2543a by right-handing are received in the second lower special winning opening 2006b. As described above, in this example, the game ball is struck at an interval of 0.6 seconds when the handle lever 504 is rotated to the right so that the second special winning opening 2006 is closed and then opened again. It is different from the game ball that passes through the second upper prize hole 2006a and reaches the second lower prize hole 2006b or between the second upper prize hole 2006a and the second lower prize hole 2006b. There is a high possibility that the game ball of No. 2 will reach on the second upper special winning opening 2006a or in the vicinity of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. Therefore, the second half of the "16R certainty variation big hit 2" and "16R certainty variation big hit 3" that executes the short-time opening control in which the interval from the state of closing the second special winning opening 2006 to the state of being opened again is 2.0 seconds. In the “8 rounds”, one game ball can be inserted into each of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b in one round.

In the above example, in the case of a "big hit" in which the second special winning opening 2006 is used, both the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning opening 2006b are controlled to be opened in one round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least when the opening/closing pattern for controlling the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 for a long period of time is executed, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower large opening are performed in one round. Only one of the winning openings 2006b may be controlled to be opened, and in this case, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are alternately controlled to be opened for each round. Good. For example, the special lottery results are "4R certainty variation jackpot", "5R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", "7R certainty variation jackpot", "8R jackpot (8R certainty variation jackpot, 8R regular jackpot)", "10R certainty jackpot", In the case of "16R probability variation big hit 1" and "16R probability variation big hit 3 first half 8 rounds", the first round (1R) makes the second upper prize hole 2006a open and can accept the game ball, and cannot be accepted. The second round special winning opening 2006b may be opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game ball can be received while the closed state is satisfied by satisfying the condition. In this way, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until the predetermined number of rounds have been exhausted, so that the "big hit" is the second upper large during the second attacker passage 2543a. Either one of the winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted without fail. Therefore, when the game ball is circulated in the second attacker passage 2543a by hitting right in this state. , The game ball is always accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, and it is possible to entertain the player by eliminating the omission of the game ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned plurality of big hits, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is different according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result in the non-time saving state (the state where the time saving control is not executed) is the 8R normal big hit in which the probability improving control is not executed after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. If the second special lottery result in the non-time saving state (the state where the time saving control is not executed) is the 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is the 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Also, in the low probability non-time saving state (state in which neither probability improving control nor time saving control is executed: also called normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improving control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R certainty variation big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. When it is a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, by the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002, and by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol display devices is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the stop display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 (until the result of the first special lottery is suggested) and (2) Until the stop display of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting mouth 2004, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is newly started on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. Because it is not possible, the variable display start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery). It is put on hold until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the first starting opening sensor 2104 has detected the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002, and the second starting opening sensor 2551. By the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004, and stored, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. In addition, the maximum number of each of the first special random number and the second special random number that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four, and if the number is more than four, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 have a game. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding it. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game store side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are designed to preferentially digest the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the variable display start of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special control result is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above-mentioned eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit at this stop.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, based on a control signal (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of a series of decorative symbols composed of a plurality of different symbols (“1” to “9” in this example) is a plurality of columns (for example, left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right symbol). Variable display of each decorative pattern row is started in the state where it is displayed, and after that, it is sequentially stopped and displayed (in this example, it is stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern) ), when all the decorative symbol rows are finally stopped and displayed, the player side is informed of the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols. It is supposed to be done. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows fluctuate according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start winning occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. The decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are better than the first special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) that suggests the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 and the time that suggests the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the final image is confirmed). (Time until is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decoration body of the center accessory 2500 and the left side of the back are displayed in accordance with the lottery special lottery result. A middle decoration unit 3050, a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 143(a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 143(a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first stores in various registers and RAM as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that has been saved. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power was turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress status of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the backup process refers to the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU without executing the initialization process (step S1). , Executes a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special symbol) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped. Random number, second special random number), the variable random number used for the lottery process for the variation time required for the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol Reach in the variable display of the decorative pattern executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (a state in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the same pattern and the middle decorative pattern is not yet stopped, left, middle, Reach random number used for lottery process of whether to display all the decorative patterns on the right in sync with each other so that they are the same symbol), if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the special random number Symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) used in the lottery process for determining the type, and the lottery process involved in the winning or winning of the operation of the second starting door member 2549. It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as ordinary random numbers.

In addition, in this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first winning opening 2002 is started, the second winning opening 2004 is won. Even in the case, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach effect execution rate can be determined by acquiring the reach random number from a counter with a different range of random numbers. You may make it different, the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the reach random number acquired, and the second special symbol, different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (fluctuating random number) among these random numbers that is not related to winning or losing is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

FIG. 143(b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 143(b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, the second. Detection signals from various switches such as the second lower prize hole sensor 2557 and the general prize sensor 3015 are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols and the ordinary symbols is stopped are updated, and the random number counter Counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU). The corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flag).

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for a win or loss that is an operation trigger of the second starting door member 2549. .. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting opening door member 2549 is higher within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game except for some big hits. Is configured to execute (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game, and the ordinary variation time required for displaying the variation of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the result of the ordinary symbol is selected. When the hit occurs, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is extended and the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened is increased to realize such a time saving state.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next processes the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command similarly set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal pattern process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S18, next, outputs data such as hit information (16R sure change big hit, 10R sure change big hit, etc.) supplied from the external terminal board to the hole management computer. Performs output information output processing.

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the special winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower big winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, etc. are in the ON state, the payout control is performed so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. The payout control command is output to the substrate 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834, and pays out the prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking the increase/decrease in the number of holdings as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the content of the register is restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 2104. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and this is stored in the RAM The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in one special symbol reserved storage area is executed (step S32). Moreover, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2551 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit executing flag is set, the big hit game is controlled. The process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R probability big hit", "8R normal big hit", and "8R probability big hit". Based on the fact, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened and closed based on the fact that the "10R probability variation big hit" is suggested. Further, based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped to be a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the opening and closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 is performed, and "4R The second big winning a prize based on the mode that suggests "probable variation big hit", "5R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", "7R certainty variation jackpot", "8R certainty variation jackpot", and "16R certainty variation jackpot" The opening and closing of 2006 is controlled. Further, when the jackpot game based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "10R probability variable jackpot", and the variation of the second special symbol The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the display is stopped suggests "4R Probable Change Big Hit", "5R Probable Change Big Hit", "6R Probable Change Big Hit", "7R Probable Change Big Hit", "8R Probable Change Big Hit", "16R Probable Change Big Hit" When ending the big hit game based on becoming the mode to be, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable big hit" When the jackpot game based on that is finished, in a state other than the normal state, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped suggests "2R probability variable jackpot". When the big hit game based on what has become, the time saving control (time saving state control) is executed until the next big hit by setting the time saving flag. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is finished based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is the mode that suggests "8R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game Special symbol (1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol) The number of fluctuations that counts the number of fluctuations is set to "72" and the special flag (1st special symbol, 1st special symbol Time saving control (control of time saving state) is executed until the number of fluctuations of (two special symbols) reaches 72 times. Also, when the jackpot game is finished based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during the time saving state, the second special game is ended. Depending on the result of the lottery, "18", "36", "54", or "72" is set to the fluctuation counter and the special flag (1st special symbol, 1st special symbol, 1st special symbol, The time saving control (time saving state control) is executed until the number of fluctuations of (2 special symbols) reaches the number of times corresponding to the second special lottery result out of 18, 36, 54, 72 times. Also, a high probability flag is set when the jackpot game based on the probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 7R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) is ended. By doing so, probability improvement control (control of high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high-probability time-saving state when both the high-probability flag and the time-saving flag are set, and sets the high-probability non-time-saving state when only the high-probability flag is set without setting the time-saving flag. If the high probability flag is not set and only the time saving flag is set, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state (so-called time saving state), and if neither the high probability flag nor the time saving flag is set, the low probability is set. Control to a non-time saving state (so-called normal state).

On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit execution flag is set. If it is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, based on that the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode in which "small hit" is suggested. The opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled.

If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is " On condition that it is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol hold On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 2104 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 145. In the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S41, first, a counter value by a first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area. From the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S41, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display start of the first special symbol to the holding state, the following steps The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, each random number thus obtained is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU as a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. To store.

However, in the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display start of the first special symbols is not suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the variable display start of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, the main control MPU, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, the variable random number obtained in step S43, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. Whether or not, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode of the game effect to be executed After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the type (variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2551 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 146. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the second special pending number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S51, if it is determined that the number of holding of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly hold the variable display start of the second special symbol, the following steps The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S54, each random number thus obtained is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU as a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM. To store.

However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit by comparing with a variable random number, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, reach as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The effect is executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage processing, the high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. If the high probability big hit judgment value and the first special random number are compared, it is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit.If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value and the first special random number are determined. By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is the same randomness as the jackpot determination value that is set in the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152(A)) at the time of high probability and is compared with the first special random number. Numerical value, low probability big hit judgment value (3937-3946) is a big hit judgment value that is set in a big probability judgment table at low probability (see FIG. 152(A)) described later and compared with the first special random number. The random numbers are the same. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the pre-determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately specify whether or not to be a big hit, and the contents of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and this game. Any of “big hit 1 to 12” which is a big hit as pre-determination information by specifying the type of a variation pattern indicating a period (variation time) in which an effect is performed, “outside” that is not a big hit, and “reach 1 to 4” Can be classified into In this example, as shown in FIG. 148(B), the deviation variation pattern, the normal reach variation pattern, the weak SP reach variation pattern, and the strong other than the identification are determined according to the jackpot rate (also called the jackpot expected value or the jackpot reliability). A plurality of types of variation patterns are provided: an SP reach variation pattern and a specific strong SP reach variation pattern (a big hit expected value deviates variation pattern <normal reach variation pattern <weak SP reach variation pattern <strong SP reach variation pattern other than identification) <Specific strong SP reach variation pattern). In addition, the ratio of the fluctuation patterns determined by the fluctuation pattern setting processing (the first fluctuation pattern setting processing of step S82 and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing of the second special symbol process processing) to be described later and executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is inversely proportional to the expected jackpot value (deviation variation pattern>normal reach variation pattern>weak SP reach variation pattern>strong SP reach variation pattern other than specific>specific strong SP reach variation pattern). That is, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the deviation variation pattern is executed relatively frequently, while the specific strong SP reach variation pattern is rarely executed.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), if the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage process, the same random number is set regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. By comparing the small hit determination value set as a numerical value with the first special random number, it is also specified whether or not a small hit occurs. The small hit judgment value (3800-3812) at the time of high probability or low probability is set in the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability or low probability (see FIG. 152(A)) described later, and the first special random number is set. The random number is the same as the small hit determination value compared with. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the preliminary determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not a small hit is made, and the “big hit 9 to 12” including the small hit is included as the preliminary determination information. Can be classified.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second starting opening passage processing, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is displayed. If it is set, it is judged whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value By comparing with the second special random number, it is determined whether or not a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152(A)) at the time of high probability, which will be described later, and has the same randomness as the jackpot determination value compared with the second special random number. Numerical value, low probability big hit judgment value (3937-3946) is a big hit judgment value that is set in a big hit judgment table (see FIG. 152(A)) at the time of low probability and compared with the second special random number. It has the same random value. Therefore, by comparing the second special random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not to be a big hit, and the "big hit 1 to 12", which is a big hit as the pre-determination information, is not a big hit. It can be categorized as either “out” or “reach 1-4”.

In the present embodiment, the effect pre-determination process executed based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 is not executed in the time saving state (time saving time) for executing the time saving control. There is. On the other hand, in the effect pre-determination process executed based on the fact that the game ball has been received in the second starting opening 2004, the time saving control is not executed in the non-time saving state (non-time saving time). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is controlled to the non-time saving state, only the effect preliminary determination process based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 is executed and the time saving state is controlled. In this case, only the production pre-determination process based on the fact that the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 is executed.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), when it is determined in step S61 that the big special is to be achieved by comparing the first special random number with the pre-determination table, a determination value indicating which big hit If you specify the type of jackpot by comparing the first and the first design random number, and specify that it will be a big hit by comparing the second special random number and the pre-determination table, determine which big hit The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that the specific 1R 2R probability variation big hit by matching the first special random number is set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152(C)) described later, and the first symbol random number. Among the judgment values to be compared with, the random number is the same as the judgment value (0-16) that indicates that it is a specific 1 big hit, and if it matches the first special random number, the 8R probability variation big hit of the specific 6 or non-specific The determination value indicating that the 2R is an 8R normal jackpot is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 152(C)) described later and is 6 or non-specific 2 among the determination values that are compared with the first symbol random number. The determination value (17-154, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit is the same random number value, and the determination value indicating that it is a 10R certainty variation big hit of the specific 7 when it matches the first special random number will be described later. With the same random number value as the determination value (155-159) indicating that the specific 7 jackpot is set among the determination values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152(C)) and compared with the first symbol random number. Has been done.

Similarly, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), when it is determined in step S61 that the big special is to be achieved by comparing the second special random number with the pre-determination table, a determination indicating which big hit is to be made If you specify the type of big hit by comparing the value and the second design random number, and specify that it will be a big hit by comparing the second special random number and the pre-determination table, indicate which big hit The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the judgment value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that the specific 1R 2R probability variation big hit or the non-specific 1 2R normal big hit by matching with the second special random number is a symbol determination table described later (see FIG. 152(C)). Is set to a random number value that is the same as the determination value (0-19, 160-199) that indicates a big hit of the specific 1 or the non-specific 1 among the determination values that are set to the second symbol random number, and the second Judgment value that indicates that it becomes a big hit of a specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, a specific 3 5R probability variation big hit, a particular 4 6R probability variation big hit, a particular 5 7R probability variation big hit, a specific 6 8R probability variation big hit Is a determination value (20-55) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 2 to specific 6 among the determination values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152(C)) described later and compared with the second symbol random number. Is the same random number value, and the determination value indicating that it becomes the 16R certainty variation big hit of the specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) by matching the second special random number is the symbol determination table (FIG. 152 (C) reference) and the determination value (56-159) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) among the determination values that are set to be compared with the second symbol random number. The random numbers are the same. In this example, three types of 16R certainty variation jackpots, namely, a specific 8-1, a particular 8-2, and a particular 8-3, in which the opening and closing states of the second special winning opening 2006 are different, are provided as the specific 8 16R certainty variation jackpots. Then, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), the specific 8-1, the specific 8-2, and the specific 8-3 in which the opening and closing modes of the second special winning opening 2006 are different are collectively specified as the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 8. It is supposed to do. The pre-determination table may be set so that it can be specified whether it is the specific 8-1, the specific 8-2, or the specific 8-3. Thereby, the effect can be executed based on a more detailed result (type of jackpot).

In addition, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), when it is determined that a big hit is to be achieved, a plurality of types of reach effects are obtained by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. Which of the above-mentioned reach effects is executed to be a big hit is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the jackpots of the specification 7 and the specification 8 (specification 8-1 to specification 8-3) is a determination value that is compared with the variable random number. Of these, a determination value indicating the execution of the normal reach effect is set to the same random number value, and a determination value indicating that the super reach effect having a low jackpot expectation degree (hereinafter, also referred to as weak SP reach) is executed (5- 29) is the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter, this) Is also referred to as a strong SP reach), a determination value (30-216) indicating execution of a process other than a specific super reach effect (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is specified among the determination values compared with the variable random number. Other than the super reach effect, the random number is the same as the judgment value that indicates that the super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is to be executed. The determination value (217-240) that indicates that is the same random number value as the determination value that indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values that are compared with the variable random number.

In addition, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 2 to 6 or the non-specific 2 jackpot is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values that are compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29), which is the same random number as the value and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is executed, is a super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (30-216), which is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that the execution is performed, indicates that a specific super-reach effect other than the specific super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is to be executed. Among the judgment values to be compared, it is the same random number value as the judgment value that indicates to execute a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super-reach effect, and it is specified among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation The determination value (217-240) indicating that the super-reach effect is to be executed is the same random number value as the determination value that indicates to execute a specific super-reach effect among the determination values that are compared with the variable random number. There is.

In addition, the judgment value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 1 or non-specific 1 jackpot is the judgment value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (90-189), which has the same random number value and indicates that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is executed, executes the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (190-216), which is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that to perform, other than the specific super reach effect among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation degree, is compared with the variable random number. It is set to the same random number as the judgment value that indicates that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super-reach effect is executed. The determination value (217-240) indicating execution of the reach effect is the same random number value as the determination value indicating execution of a specific super reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number.

Therefore, by comparing the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number with the pre-determination table in step S61, and by comparing the variable random number with the pre-determination table, the type of jackpot is accurately specified, and the pre-determination is performed. As the information, "big hit 1" which is a big hit of the specific 7 or the specific 8 (specific 8-1 to the specific 8-3) from the normal reach, the specific 7 or the specific 8 (specific 8-1 to the specific 8-from the weak SP reach) 3) "Big hit 2" which is a big hit, "7 big hits", which is a big hit of 7 or 8 (specific 8-1 to 8-3) from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach "Big hit 4" which is a big 7 hit of specific 7 or special 8 (specific 8-1 to special 8-3) from strong SP reach, and "big hit 5" which includes special 2-6 or big hit of non-specific 2 from normal reach , "Big hit 6" which includes specific 2 to 6 or non-specific 2 big hits from weak SP reach, and specific 2 to 6 or non-specific 2 big hits from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach " "Big hit 7", "Big hit 8" that includes specific 2 to 6 or non-specific 2 big hits from a specific strong SP reach, "Specific big or non-specific 1 big hit from normal reach" "Big hit 9", weak SP reach From the specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit "big hit 10", from the strong SP reach other than the specific strong SP reach specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit "big hit 11", from the specific strong SP reach It can be classified as either “specific jackpot 1” or “non-specific 1 jackpot” “jackpot 12”.

In addition, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), when it is specified that there is a deviation, the reach is displayed when the high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change and the reach random number, it is specified whether the reach is displayed or not, and the high probability flag is not set and the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is controlled. If only the time saving flag indicating that the reach is being displayed is set, it is determined whether or not the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value of the time saving indicating that the reach is displayed and the reach random number. If the probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, the reach is displayed by comparing the reach judgment value at the normal time, which indicates that the reach is displayed, with the reach random number. Specify whether to display. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to a reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 152(B)) described later to be the same random number value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to a reach determination table (see FIG. 152(B)) to be described later, which is the same random number value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is the same random number value as the reach determination value that is set in the below-described normal reach determination table (see FIG. 152B) and compared with the reach random number. .. Therefore, in step S61, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-determination table, it is possible to accurately specify whether or not the reach effect is to be executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the big hit does not occur. As the determination information, it is possible to classify it into either "reach" that does not display the reach (execute the reach effect) or "reach 1 to 4" that displays the reach (execute the reach effect).

In addition, the reach determination value (0-5) at the time saving time and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, whether to display the reach (execute the reach effect) in any of the game states of the probability change, the time saving, and the normal time is classified. Therefore, in step S61, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-determination table, it is determined whether the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes the reach effect as a game effect in any of the game states of the probability change, the time saving, and the normal time. Can be specified.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A), when the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the determination value and the variable random number indicating which reach effect is to be executed are set. The mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified by comparing. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating execution of the normal reach effect is set in a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later and is compared with the variable random number in the normal reach effect. The determination value (164-222), which is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that the execution is performed and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is executed, is a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown). ) Is set to a random number, and the random number is the same as the judgment value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is to be executed, and it is specified among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation. The determination value (223-235) indicating that a process other than the super reach effect is executed is set in a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and is compared with a variation random number. A random number that is the same as the judgment value that indicates that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the effect is executed, and a determination that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation The value (236-240) is the same as the judgment value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the judgment values set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and compared with the fluctuation random number. It is a random number. Therefore, in step S61, the variation random number is compared with the pre-determination table to accurately specify the mode type of the game effect to be executed, and the "reach 1" for executing the normal reach effect as the pre-determination information, the jackpot expectation level. "Reach 2" that performs low super reach production, "Reach 3" that performs high reach expectation (other than specific super reach production) with high expectation of big hit, Super reach production with high expectation of big hit (specific super reach production ) Can be classified as one of "reach 4". Then, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-determination table in step S61, the pre-determination information can be classified into any of "reach 1" to "reach 4".

As described above, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148(A) and the acquired random numbers (special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random numbers , A variation random number) as a result, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of a big hit, and if it is not a big hit or a small hit, a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 As shown in FIG. 148(B), "reject", "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" are executed as the pre-judgment information by specifying the pre-judgment information such as performing the reach effect or specifying the mode type of the game effect to be executed. , And “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

Then, in the production pre-determination process (steps S45, S55), the specified pre-determination information (whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the type of the game effect to be executed) and the type of the acquired special random number (either the first special random number or the second special random number). Then, a pre-determination command corresponding to the number of reservations (value of the number of reservations counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number is set. For example, in the production pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, that the first special random number is acquired, and the number of first special symbols reserved (Value of the first special reserved number counter), and set a first special symbol preliminary determination command according to (step S62). Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the main control board 1310 sends the pre-determination command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start winning opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting) Either one of the mouth 2004), in addition to the number of holdings stored corresponding to the starting mouth, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning is a big hit or a small hit, and a big hit. If it becomes a big hit type, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed, The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the variable display according to the start winning is started.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol, and a second storage for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the second special symbol. And a reserved storage area. Further, the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each have a storage area of 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reservations, and the peripheral control MPU first sets the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. The data is stored in order from the (first) storage area. Then, when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the pre-judgment command is received, the pre-judgment information notified to the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area Storing, special pattern (first special symbol, second special symbol) fluctuation pattern command which notifies the fluctuation display start (the first fluctuation pattern command which notifies fluctuation display start of the first special symbol, the second special symbol) When the second variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display is received, the first storage area (first storage of the first reserved storage area if the first variation pattern command is received according to the received variation pattern command) Area, if the second variation pattern command is received, the pre-determination information stored in the second reserved storage area (first storage area) is discarded and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area ( If the first fluctuation pattern command is received, it is stored in the N-th storage area of the first reserved storage area, and if the second fluctuation pattern command is received, it is stored in the N-th storage area of the second reserved storage area). The pre-determination information stored therein is moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area (the pre-determination information stored in the reserved storage area is shifted). In addition, whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol can be specified by the variation pattern command (whether the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command ), and when it is specified that the variable display of the first special symbol is started based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the advance determination information stored in the first reserved storage area is shifted. Then, when it is specified that the variable display of the second special symbol is started based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, the preliminary determination information stored in the second reserved storage area is shifted. Thereby, the pre-determination information of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information. Become so.

In the present example, the random numbers are the same as the jackpot determination value in the advance determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later, but the random number is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot determination value that includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table as the jackpot determination value of the advance determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table and a jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table that are different from each other. It may be configured to include a random number of a number, and the degree of the possibility of a big hit may be determined in the effect preliminary determination process.

Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the deviation judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be respectively distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group The ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be determined as the above to the outlier determination value is set to be higher than the proportion of the jackpot determination table that determines the winning probability of the jackpot. Among the random numbers obtained by the means, the winning random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) are classified and classified into one of the above deviation judgment value and the above big hit judgment value. While maintaining the state of, the judgment of whether the winning random number to be used for the same judgment is a value belonging to the above high probability random number group in which the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value are mixed, the suspended state Equipped with a pseudo-probability leading determination means capable of performing a leading determination about the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning for each determination processing, which is related to the jackpot winning by the above-mentioned pseudo-probability leading determination means. The degree of expectation may be determined in advance.

By providing the high-probability random number determination means in which the jackpot judgment value and the out-of-match judgment value are mixed in this way, there is a risk that confidential information about the result of the jackpot judgment still pending may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional production structure excluding the, the expectation degree (pseudo winning probability) of the big hit depending on the mixture ratio of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value in the high probability random number determination means is The preceding judgment can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the big hit judgment (digestion of the judgment process), the preceding judgment that the winning random number provided for the big hit judgment is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit judgment value) was not made. When, the expectation for the big hit when the judgment process based on the random number value (the value belonging to the low-probability random number group paired with the high-probability random number group) that is not the preceding special-judgment judgment value is exhausted It is decided that the degree (pseudo winning probability) is lower than the expected degree (probability of winning) of the jackpot (pseudo winning probability reduced).

According to the preceding determination method for such a high-probability random number group, despite the fact that the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (held state) at the time when a particular determination process is suspended. As for the expected degree (pseudo winning probability), it is possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of newly outputting the hold display or at the time of shift display according to the hold completion. Will be done.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and the random numbers used for the determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the first special symbol process flag described above, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Pattern normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81). )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83)
5. The variation control stop mode of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device. First special symbol stop process to stop the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 143).

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not the variable display start of the first special symbol is in the hold state based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that the variable display start of the first special symbol is in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserve number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserve storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. Shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode for random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display start of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display start is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as the process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 152(A). Select the big hit determination table (step S112), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S111), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 152 (A) (step S113), select The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 152(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is at a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) It is provided with a big hit determination table at the time of low probability and a big hit determination table at the time of high probability used when the game state is at the high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the low-probability big-hit determination table, similar to the pre-determination table, 10 kinds of first special random numbers coincide with the big-hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and 13 kinds of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the small hit determination value indicating that the winning has been won, and the 3924 first special random numbers match the deviation determination value that indicates the above deviation. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit determination value is set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and there is no chance to win the small hit. In the low-probability jackpot determination table, similar to the pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 3937 types of second special random numbers deviate from the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that

Further, in the high probability big hit determination table, similar to the pre-determination table, 90 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table. Matches the big hit judgment value, 19 kinds of the first special random numbers match the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and 3838 kinds of the first special random numbers match the deviation judgment value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), when the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won is low probability ) And the time saving state (low probability time saving state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the big probability determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and there is no chance to win the small hit. In the high probability big hit determination table, 90 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table are provided, as in the pre-determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won and the 3857 kinds of second special random numbers match the deviation determination value that indicates the above-mentioned lack.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S115 ), the big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set and the process ends (step S116), the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process read in step S102. As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set and the process is ended (step S118). As a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that there is no reach, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 152(B) and step S102. It is compared with the reach random number read in step S119 (step S119).

The reach determination table shown in FIG. 152(B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU and is used when the gaming state is a certain time variation (high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state)). Reach judgment table for time, and a reach judgment table for time saving that is used when the gaming state is in time saving (low probability time saving state), and when the gaming state is normal (normal state: low probability non-time saving state) And a reach determination table for normal operation. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reachable, and the reach determination value indicating that the 238 types of reach random number do not reach are reached, as in the case of the advance determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with.

Further, in the reach determination table for time saving, as in the case of the pre-determination table described above, the reach determination that indicates that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value and the reach determination value indicating that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) as compared with the probability change time (high probability state).

Further, in the normal reach determination table, like the pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the reach random numbers that are the same as the reach random numbers set in the reach determination tables for the probability variation time and the time reduction are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and the reach determination value indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating that the reach is performed is higher than in the probability variation time (high probability state) and the time saving time (low probability time saving state).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S120a), the fluctuation is concerned. Is set to reach, and the process ends (step S120b).

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 153, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery process result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 152(C). (Step S122), the type of big hit is determined, and the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S123).

As shown in FIG. 152(C), in the symbol determination table, similarly to the above-described preliminary determination table, for each determination result (specific 1 2R certainty variation big hit, specific 2 4R certainty variation big hit, specific 3 5R certainty variation big hit, specific 4R 6R probability variation big hit, specific 5 7R probability variation big hit, specification 6 8R probability variation big hit, specification 7 10R probability variation big hit, non-specific 1 2R normal big hit, non-specific 2 8R normal big hit) design random number (first symbol) Random numbers, second pattern random numbers) are stored in a form associated with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of big hit determined based on the first symbol random number, the type of big hit determined based on the second symbol random number, and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. By executing the 2R big hit game in which the game ball is difficult to enter by controlling the first big winning opening 2005 to open for a short time, the probability improving control is executed until the next big hit occurs after the 2R big hit game is finished. If the gaming state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), the specific 1R that executes time-saving control until the next big hit Probably big hit 2. By executing a 4R big hit game in which a game ball can enter by controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, probability increasing control and time saving control are performed from the end of the 4R big hit game to the next big hit. Specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot that performs both of By executing the 5R big hit game in which the game ball can enter by controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, the probability improving control and the time saving control are performed from the end of the 5R big hit game to the next big hit. 3. Specific 5R probability variation jackpot that executes both of By performing a 6R big hit game in which a game ball can enter by controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, probability increasing control and time saving control are performed until the next big hit occurs after the 6R big hit game is finished. 4. 6R certainty variation jackpot that executes both of By executing the 7R big hit game in which a game ball can enter by controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, the probability improving control and the time saving control are performed from the end of the 7R big hit game to the next big hit. 5. Specific 7R probability variation jackpot that executes both of If it is the result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute an 8R big hit game in which a game ball can enter, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, the next big hit is made. If the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the time saving control is performed until the next big hit, and the second special lottery result For example, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be open for a long time to execute an 8R big hit game in which a game ball can enter, and the probability improving control and the time saving control are performed from the end of the 8R big hit game to the next big hit. Specific 6 8R probability variation jackpot that performs both and 7. By executing a 10R big hit game in which a game ball can enter by controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, probability increasing control and time saving control are performed from the end of the 10R big hit game to the next big hit. Specific 10R probability variation jackpot that performs both of By executing a 16R big hit game in which a game ball can be entered by controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, probability increasing control and time saving control are performed from the end of the 16R big hit game to the next big hit. Specified 8-1 16R certainty jackpot 1 to execute both
9. A 16R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed while controlling the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time, and probability increasing control and time saving control are performed from the end of the 16R big hit game to the next big hit. Specified 8-2 16R certainty jackpot 2 to execute both
10. You can enter the game ball while controlling the opening of the second prize hole 2006 for a short time after executing the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter by opening the second prize hole 2006 for a long time. 16R big hit game that executes 16R big hit game that executes eight rounds of opening and closing patterns, and executes both probability improvement control and time saving control until the next big hit after finishing the 16R big hit game Three
11. By executing the 2R big hit game in which the game ball is difficult to enter by controlling the first big winning opening 2005 to be opened for a short time, the probability improving control is not executed until the next big hit occurs after the 2R big hit game is finished. However, if the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is repeated a predetermined number of times after the 2R jackpot game is over. 12. Non-specific 1R 2R normal jackpot that executes time saving control until it is executed (any of 18, 36, 54, 72 times). By executing the 8R big hit game in which a game ball can enter by controlling the first big winning opening 2005 to be opened for a long time, the probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit comes after the 8R big hit game is finished. However, if the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) 72 times after the end of the 8R jackpot game Any one of the 12 types of big hits of the non-specific 2R 8R normal big hit that executes the time saving control until it is executed is determined.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different as compared with the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the type of jackpot and the determination rate are different. I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152(C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, the specific 6 8R probability variation big hit, the specific 7 10R probability variation big hit, non While the distribution of the judgment value is set for the specific 2 8R normal big hit, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the specific 1 2R certainty variation big hit, the specific 2 4R certainty variation big hit, specific 3R 5R probability variation big hit, specified 4 6R probability variation big hit, specification 5 7R probability variation big hit, specification 6 8R probability variation big hit, specification 8-1 16R probability variation big hit 1, specification 8-2 16R probability variation big hit 2, specification 8- The distribution of judgment values is set for 3 16R probability big hits 3 and non-specific 1 2R normal big hits.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether it is a big hit game that controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 or a big hit game that opens and closes controlling the second big winning opening 2006, in the big hitting game, it is in the upper part of the center character 2500. A so-called right hitting game is performed in which the game ball is hit to the right in the front view rather than the center in the left-right direction. Further, in the right hitting game area 2540 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, no obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, if a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second special winning opening 2006, the second The big prize hole 2006 is always won. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled, the game ball hit in the right hitting game area 2540 is not wasted (is discharged to the outside from the outlet 1111 (2543c)). You can digest big hit games in a short time.

On the other hand, between the right hitting game area 2540 and the first special winning opening 2005, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, so that the game ball is obstructed. By abutting on the nail, various movements are given to the game ball so that the game ball flows down. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is controlled, even if a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 Not necessarily winning, the game balls that have not won the first big winning opening 2005 are discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower end of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the game balls are more efficient than in the first big winning opening 2005 in the big hitting game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled. The second big winning opening 2006 is won, and the big hit game can be digested in a short time.

Further, in this example, in one round in the opening/closing control of the first special winning opening 2005, the condition for changing the first special winning opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state and the opening/closing control of the second special winning opening 2006. The condition for changing the second special winning opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round is different. As described above, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are changed to the closed state after 29 seconds have passed after being controlled to the open state. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, the game balls are changed to the closed state. In the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled, the first big winning opening 2005 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that seven game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005. In the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the second big winning opening 2006 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that 10 game balls have been won in the second big winning opening 2006. In the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled in this way, only seven game balls can be won at the first big winning hole 2005, and thus the prize balls for seven winnings per round ( (105 in the example), while in the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize hole 2006, a maximum of 10 game balls are awarded to the second big prize hole 2006 and 10 balls per round. You can win prize balls for winning (150 in this example), and you can get more prize balls in the big hit game that controls opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 compared to the big hit game that controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005. Can be expected.

Further, when the type of big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be the specific 1R 2R probability variation jackpot, it is determined to be the 2R probability variation jackpot design of the first special symbol, and when it is determined to be the specific 6 8R probability variation jackpot, the first special symbol 8R probability variation jackpot. If you decide on the symbol, 10R certainty variation jackpot of the specific 7 decided on the 10R certainty variation jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, if you decide on the 8R normal jackpot of the non-specific 2 8R normal of the first special symbol Decide on a jackpot design. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124), and if the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hit flag is not set, it is determined to be a deviating symbol as the mode when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S126).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as a process of step S127, these lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach out, out of instruction (stop symbol of the first special symbol Of the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, after that, as the process of step S128, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped (stop symbol), the 10R probability variable jackpot of the specific 7 out of the jackpots from the received determination result notification command. If specified, it is determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot design (combination in which the decoration symbols on the left, middle, and right are all the first specific odd design (for example, "7")), and the 16R probability variation jackpot 1 of the specification 8-1 is specified. In the case of 16R probability variation jackpot 1 symbol (the combination of all left middle right decorative symbols is the first specific odd number symbol (for example, "7")), and the change time specified from the change pattern command elapses. At the time (at the end of the game effect), the display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Thus, when the combination of all the first specific odd-numbered symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has stopped fluctuating, the 10R probability variation big hit or the specific 8-of the specific symbol from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 16R probability change jackpot 1 of 1, the number of rounds is the largest among the jackpots caused by the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game to the second special winning opening 2006 It is possible to determine that the winning of the 10R jackpot game, which is easy to win the ball, has been confirmed. Further, the peripheral control MPU, when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped (stop symbol), when the 16R probability variation big hit 2 of the specific 8-2 is specified, the 16R probability variation big hit 2 symbol (The combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is the second specific odd number symbol (for example, "5")) is determined, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect) The display of the determined stop symbol is controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combinations that are all the second specific odd-numbered symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 have stopped changing, the 16R probability variation jackpot 2 of the 16R specific 8-2 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the expectation value of the number of winning prize balls is the highest among the jackpots due to the result of the second special lottery (the probability of winning the most prize balls is high). ..

Further, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 4R probability variation big hit of the specific 2 out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as the mode (stopping pattern) when the variation of the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. In the case of 4R probability variation big hit symbol (combination consisting of the same odd symbol of "1", "5", "9" odd number symbols)), and when the 5R probability variation jackpot of specific 3 of the jackpots is specified Is a combination of 5R certainty variation big hit symbols (the same odd number symbol of "1", "5", "9" odd number symbols. 4R certainty variation big hit symbol is common) If you specify a big hit 6R probability variation big hit symbol (combination consisting of the same odd symbol of the odd symbols "1", "5", "9". 4R probability variation jackpot symbol and 5R probability variation jackpot symbol common) Determined, if you specify a 7R certainty variation big hit of the big hit 7R certainty variation big hit symbol (a combination of the same odd symbol of the odd symbols of "1", "5", "9. 4R certain variation. Big hit design, 5R certainty variation big hit design, and 6R certainty variation big hit design are common), and when 8R certainty variation big hit of specific 6 is specified based on the second special lottery result among the big hits, 8R certainty variation big hit design ("1 "5", "5", a combination consisting of the same odd symbol of the odd symbols of "9". 4R certainty variation jackpot design, 5R certainty variation jackpot design, 6R certainty variation jackpot design, and 7R certainty variation jackpot design are common), If you specify 16R probability variation big hit 3 of the specific 8-3 out of the big hits, 16R probability variation big hit 3 symbols (a combination of the same odd symbol of the odd symbols of "1", "5", "9". 4R. Probably variable jackpot design, 5R certainty jackpot design, 6R certainty jackpot design, 7R certainty jackpot design, and 8R certainty jackpot design are common, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of game production) In the display control of the determined stop symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of the same odd symbols among the odd symbols “1”, “5”, and “9” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 fluctuates and stops, the decorative symbol stops. From the design, the specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, the specification 3 5R probability variation big hit, the specification 4 6R probability variation big hit, the specification 5 7R probability variation big hit, the specification 6 8R probability variation big hit, the specification 8-3 16R probability variation big hit 3 Although it cannot be determined, it is possible to determine to control to the high-probability state after the end of the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 2006.

Further, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped changing, is specified based on the first special lottery result from the jackpot from the received determination result notification command 6 When 8R probability variation big hit of 8R probability variation big hit is specified, it decides to 8R probability variation big hit design (the combination which consists of the same even design of even design of “2”, “4”, “6” and “8”), If the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit is specified, the 8R normal big hit symbol (a combination of the same even symbols among the even symbols of "2", "4", "6", "8". It is determined to be the same as the jackpot pattern), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of the same even symbols among the even symbols of “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped variably, It is not possible to discriminate between the specific 6 8R probability variation big hit and the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative design, and the high probability state is established after the big hit game in which the opening and closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 is finished. It is impossible to determine whether to control or not.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 2R certainty variation big hit of the specific 1 out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command, as a mode (stopping pattern) when the variation of the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. In 2R probability variation big hit pattern (combination of predetermined decorative patterns among outliers (separation). Specifically, a combination including all decorative patterns of "3", "5" and "7") However, when the 2R normal big hit of the non-specific 1 is specified, the 2R normal big hit design (a combination of predetermined decorative designs among the outlying designs (separation). It is common with the 2R probability variation big hit design) is decided. When the hit is specified, it is determined to be a small hit design (a combination of predetermined decorative designs among the outlying designs (separation). 2R sure variation big hit design and 2R normal big hit design are common), and specified from the variation pattern command. At the time of the lapse of the fluctuating time (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In addition, both the 2R big hit game executed based on the 2R probability variation big hit and the 2R normal big hit and the small hit game executed based on the small hit are both the first big winning opening 2005 for a short time. The opening and closing mode (the opening time of the first big winning opening 2005, the number of times of opening, the opening interval, etc.) is the same opening and closing mode. Therefore, the opening and closing mode of the first big winning opening 2005 is 2R. It is not possible to determine whether the big hit game is being executed or the small hit game is being executed. In this way, when the combination of the decorative design of "357" as the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, from the stop design of the decorative design to the specific 1 2R probability variation big hit and 2R normal big hit and small hit. In addition to not being able to determine which of the two is a big hit game is being executed or a small hit game is being executed from the opening/closing mode of the first special winning opening 2005 as well. In order to execute a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in the high probability state (whether or not the probability improvement control is executed) even after the 2R big hit game or the small hit game is finished, It is impossible to determine whether or not the high probability state is controlled after the big hit game or after the small hit game.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU identifies the reach loss from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped, it is detached with the reach. Determining the design (combination of decorative patterns that cannot be the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same), and if the flare is specified, the flare pattern without reach (the combination of the decorative patterns that are not the same. The symbols are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set If it is done (step S141), the type of big hit determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the current game state are selected (step). S142), if the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hits according to the current game state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. For example (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S146), and when the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, That is, in the case of a normal deviation (a deviation without executing the reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of deviation is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the variation pattern table is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the variation pattern determined in this way, the special symbol after starting the variable display of the content of the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) It also includes information indicating the variation time until the variable display of the (first special symbol in this case) is stopped. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 by receiving the variation pattern command set in step S149 starts the variation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changes in special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting variable display of contents and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The variable time until the display is stopped is specified. Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time, which is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern, in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display (variable display of the first special symbol) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (variable display of the decorative symbol) only for the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is varied. It is stored in such a manner that it is associated with each random number. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the pattern random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variable random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, like the advance determination table, the aspect type of the reach effect executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number, Is set to decide. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers coincide with the determination value (0-163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of random numbers are either super reach effects with a low jackpot expectation. Matches the determination value (164-222) that indicates that the 18-variable random numbers are executed, and matches the determination value (223-240) that indicates that one of the super reach effects with high jackpot expectation is executed. As described above, the above-mentioned variable random numbers are associated with each other. The super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super-reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S151, a variation counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol after the big hit game (first special symbol and second special symbol) It is determined whether or not the counter value is "0". As described above, in the present example, the second special lottery result is a non-specific 1 2R normal big hit, and when the time saving control is executed at the time of winning, the special symbol (the first symbol after the 2R big hit game is finished The special symbol and the second special symbol) variable display is controlled until a predetermined number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times) are executed, and the first special lottery result is an unspecified 2R 8R When it is a big hit and when the time saving control is executed at the time of winning, the time saving control until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game To do. Therefore, when the non-specific 1 2R normal big hit is finished in the big hit control process, the number of times (any one of 18, 36, 54, 72 times) corresponding to the second special lottery result is set in the fluctuation number counter. When the non-specific 2R normal big hit is finished, the fluctuation number counter is set to "72" times. In step S151, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the number of times set in the variation number counter has been executed after the big hit game. Then, if this counter value is not "0", that is, if the variation display of the number of times set in the variation number counter is not executed after the big hit game, after the variation number counter is counted down (subtracted by 1) (step S152). Then, it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is "0" (step S153). As a result, if the counter value is "0", that is, if the variable display of the number of times set in the number-of-changes counter is executed after the big hit game, an end flag indicating that is set (step S154). ..

When it is determined that the counter value of the variation counter is "0" in the process of step S151, that is, the variation of the number already set in the variation counter after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. When the display is being executed, or when it is determined that the variation counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, that is, the variation counter is still set after the jackpot game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. If the variable display of the performed number of times is not executed, the process proceeds to step S155 at that time. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is ended. In addition, in the case of executing the time saving control from the end of the big hit game caused by the big hits of the specific 1 to the specific 8-3 until the next big hit, "0" is set to the variation counter in the big hit control process. On the other hand, by setting the time saving flag, the time saving control is continued until the next big hit.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S171. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process is finished at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S181. As a process, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device, the first special symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the variation display of the number of times set in the variation counter after the jackpot game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2 when the end flag is set. Sometimes (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and the time saving flag is reset if the time saving flag is set (step S185). ). As a result, the control of the low probability non-time saving state (normal state) is executed after the variation display of the number of times set in the variation number counter is executed after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2. ..

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (time for displaying the start of the big hit game and the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S190), this process is ended. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is a type of jackpot (2R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 7R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit. , 16R definite variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) are individually prepared. In step S187, depending on the type of big hit (2R sure change big hit, 4R sure change big hit, 5R sure change big hit, 7R sure change big hit, 8R sure change big hit, 10R sure change big hit, 16R sure change big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) Big hit start command (2R probability variation big hit start command, 4R probability variation big hit start command, 5R probability variation big hit start command, 6R probability variation big hit start command, 7R probability variation big hit start command, 8R probability variation big hit start command, 10R probability variation big hit start command, 16R probability variation big hit start command Start command, 2R normal jackpot start command, 8R normal jackpot start command). As a result, the effect of the big hit game according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker 921 and the like.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started (step S192), The waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S194), and the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When updated (step S190), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and in step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit game instructed by the small hit start command is displayed on the main liquid crystal. It is executed by the display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, a process executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 157, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has passed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker 921, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S502, the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, in the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) The control process relating to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

Also, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is serialized for the lamp drive board. For the game board decoration drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the I/O port to the effect drive board 3043 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in the game board 5 Door side for transmitting from the serial I/O port to the production drive board 3043, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3 or the door lower right drive motor 272. Door-side drive emission data composed of drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is used for the liquid crystal control unit. It executes processing such as transmission to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 from the serial I/O port, and output of a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC. In the random number updating process of step S606, a random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a notice of a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 99) used in a lottery process related to a specific notice effect described later). A process of updating a value of a random number counter or the like for generating a judgment random number is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, immediately after the 16 ms steady process is started, the 16 ms steady process is started from the beginning (command of step S601). Do not execute (from parsing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated by either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the advance notice determination processing executed in the command analysis processing (step S601). As shown in FIG. 159, when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 (step S301), the suspension corresponding to the number of suspensions indicated by the received pre-determination command. The pre-determination information is stored in the storage area (step S302). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the reserved storage area for storing the preliminary judgment information indicated by the preliminary judgment command, the first reserved storage area in which the preliminary judgment information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol is stored, and the second It is provided with a second reserved storage area in which advance determination information regarding variable display of special symbols is stored, and further, the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each correspond to the number of reservations 4 of 1 to 4. It has two storage areas. Peripheral control MPU, if the received pre-judgment command indicates the pre-judgment information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, the pre-judgment in the storage area according to the number of reservations indicated by the pre-judgment command in the first reserved storage area If information is stored and the received pre-judgment command indicates pre-judgment information related to the variable display of the second special symbol, the pre-judgment is performed in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the pre-judgment command in the second reserved storage area. Stores judgment information.

Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a specific notice effect described below is being executed (step S303), and whether or not the number of holdings indicated by the received advance determination command is "4" (step S304). , If the preliminary announcement command is not being executed and the number of holdings indicated by the preliminary judgment command is "4", the reserved storage area storing the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command (variable display of the first special symbol) The number of reservations "1" to "3" in the first reservation storage area if it indicates the preliminary judgment information regarding the second reservation storage area if it indicates the preliminary judgment information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol In the storage area corresponding to, any one of the jackpot 1 to the jackpot 12 and the reach 1 to reach 4 which are set as the advance determination information other than the deviation, specifically, the advance determination information in the advance determination table shown in FIG. 148(A). It is determined whether or not the preliminary determination information is stored (step S305).

If the pre-determination information other than the dislocation is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations “1” to “3” among the reserved storage areas storing the pre-determination information indicated by the pre-determination command received in step S305 (YES in step S305), the process is ended without executing the processes of steps S306 to S309, that is, the lottery process of whether or not to execute the specific announcement effect. In the present embodiment, a series of stories as a special notice effect is given a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) a plurality of times (three times in this example, but may be two times, or two variable displays). The special liquid crystal display device 1600 may perform the specific notice effect separately executed and the special notice effect separately performed in three times of variable display, and may be executed separately. The decoration pattern is divided into a plurality of predetermined variable display times (three times in this example) and executed (a story that is completed in three episodes is displayed one by one for each variable display of the decorative pattern). To run). Further, instead of the variable display of the decorative pattern in each of the plurality of variable display of the decorative pattern for executing the specific notice effect (the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the end portion (for example, the upper left end portion) of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is also possible to display a part of a series of stories (one time of a series of stories executed in three times) and then a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is displayed. In this case, if a variation display that is a big hit, a small hit, or a reach is included in the variation display that executes the specific notice effect, the big hit game or the small hit game is started in the middle of the series of stories. It is impossible to execute the whole series of stories. In addition, it is not executed when it is a big hit or a small hit, but if it is executed when it is a reach, it will always be out if it reaches during the execution of the specific notice effect. Even if the awareness is realized and the reach production is executed, the expectation for the big hit cannot be held at all. Therefore, in this example, when a start winning is generated, a variation display that does not accompany a reach as a variation display in which the start condition of the variation display is not satisfied other than the generated starting prize is predetermined ( In this example, the lottery process of whether or not to execute the specific notice effect is executed only when the stored information is stored three times.

If the prior determination information other than the out-of-range is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations “1” to “3” among the reserved storage areas storing the preliminary determination information indicated by the preliminary determination command received in step S305. (NO in step S305), while selecting the advance notice determination table according to the advance determination information (step S306), the advance notice determination within the numerical value range (for example, 0 to 99) predetermined by the random number updating process (step S606) described above. One advance notice determination random number is obtained from the random number counter that updates the random number, and the obtained advance notice determination random number is compared with the advance notice determination table selected in step S306 (step S307).

In the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table to be compared with the advance notice determination random number is provided for each of the above-described advance determination information (departure, big hit 1 to big hit 12, reach 1 to reach 4), and hit (big hit, The type of small hits is the same in the pre-determination information (in this example, the big hits 1 to 4 are the same kind of big hits (specific 7, 8), and the big hits 5 to 8 are the same kind of big hits (specific 2 to 6, non-specific). 2), and the big hits 9 to 12 are big hits of the same type (specific 1, non-specific 1, small hit), the big hit expectation degree of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the big hit expectation degree is high). The determination value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific announcement effect increases in proportion to (specific strong SP reach≧strong SP reach other than specific> weak SP reach> normal reach).

In addition, in the notice determination table that is selected when the pre-determination information indicates that the reach is reached when it does not result in a hit, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the high jackpot expectation degree is specified. The determination value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect increases in proportion to (strong SP reach>strong SP reach other than specific>weak SP reach>normal reach). On the other hand, in the advance announcement determination table selected when the advance advance determination information indicates that the advance advance information is out of order, the determination value is assigned so that the specific advance announcement effect is not executed regardless of the obtained advance announcement determination random number.

In this way, the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed (in this example, when it is determined that the specific notice effect is executed, the variable display based on the hold that is the cause of the determination is displayed three times before the variation display is started. In the case where the specific notice effect is executed over the variable display and the variable display that causes the execution of the specific notice effect is executed for the fourth time), the minimum reach effect is executed even if there is no small hit or big hit. , It is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of a big hit when the specific notice production is executed. In addition, even if the pre-determination information is other than the off, the ratio of executing the specific notice effect increases in proportion to the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect, and thus the change notice is displayed after the specific notice effect is executed. It is possible to pay attention to the type of reach effect produced and to increase the expectation for a big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed.

Further, comparing each group of pre-judgment information collected for each type of winning, the degree of advantage to the player (in this example, the degree of advantage to the player is high for the big hits of specific 7 and 8). ~ 4> specific 2-6, big hits combined with non-specific 2 big hits 5-8> big hits of specific 1, non-specific 1 and big hits 9-12 combined with small hits) The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific announcement effect is high. Then, since the reach 1 to 4 gathered by the outlying reach have a lower degree of advantage to the player than the prior determination information to be a hit, the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is lower than the jackpot 1 to 12. Is set to. As a result, a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player when the specific notice effect is executed, specifically, when the specific notice effect is executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol, an expectation for the occurrence of the 10R certainty variation big hit. It is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of the 16R certainty variation jackpot when the specific notice effect is executed for the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment completes the series of stories by executing the specific advance notice effect over a plurality of predetermined (three times in this example) variable display of the decorative design. It is what makes me. However, in the determination as to whether or not to execute the specific notice effect, the specific notice effect is executed over the variable display less than the number of times predetermined as the number of notices (in this example, once or twice). Decisions (so-called gasse notice) can also be made. If you decide to execute this geek notice, the specific notice production will end without completing the series of stories, and you will have an expectation for the big hit in the variable display after the specific notice production is executed I can't. Therefore, the player plays a game while hoping that the specific notice effect is executed over a predetermined number of variable displays. In addition, when the specific notice effect is executed, the specific notice effect may be restarted when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started again after being temporarily ended in the middle of the series of stories. As a result, even if the advance notice is executed, it can be expected to restart the specific notice effect.

When the effect control MPU compares the advance notification determination random number with the selected advance notification determination table and determines that the specific advance notification effect is to be executed (YES in step S308), the specific advance effect is being executed or the advance notification effect is being executed. The notice flag indicating that is set is set, the determined number of specific notice effects is set in the notice counter, and the process ends (step S309). The notice flag is referred to in the determination as to whether or not to execute the specific notice effect in step S303 described above or in the variable effect start process described later. If the notice flag is set in step S303, the effect control MPU gives the specific notice effect. If it is determined that the process is being executed, and the notice flag is set in the variation effect start process described later, the process data for executing the specific notice effect is selected from the process data corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310. Then, by controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the specific notice effect is executed. Also, if the number of times of execution of the specific notice production is determined to be 1, the notice counter is set to "1", and if it is determined to be 2 times, the notice counter is set to "2", and is determined to be 3 times. If so, the advance notice counter is set to "3". As a result, the specified notice effect is executed over the variable display of the number of times of execution of the specified notice effect set in the notice counter in step S309.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 and indicating the progress status of the game. Will be done.

1. Variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed by the command analysis processing (first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second variation that indicates the variation pattern of the second special symbol) After performing the process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the pattern command), the fluctuating effect start process of changing the effect process flag to a value according to the fluctuating effect process (step S711). )
2. The process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc., controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. according to the elapsed time During the fluctuating effect for changing the effect process flag to a value according to the fluctuation ending process in response to the lapse of the variable time corresponding to the pattern (step S712)
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a symbol stop command that instructs the variable display stop of the special symbol, and if it is out of the range, the effect process flag is a value according to the variable effect start process. To a value corresponding to the big hit production process if it is a big hit, and to a value according to a small hit production process if it is a small hit (step S713).
4. On the basis of receiving a big hit start command for instructing the start of the big hit game, a process for executing display control during the big hit game is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the big hit game is finished, the effect process flag is set. Big hit production process to change to a value according to the variation production start process (step S714)
5. A process for executing display control during the small hit game is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game. Small hit production processing which changes the production process flag to a value according to the variable production start processing (step S715)

Main liquid crystal display in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) by the above processing The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the device 1600.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation effect starting process (step S711). When the production control process flag indicates that the variation production start process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 first causes the variation pattern command (first variation). It is determined whether the pattern command or the second variation pattern command) has been received (step S801). If the variation pattern command is received, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the received determination result notification command (step S802).

Specifically, if the peripheral control MPU has received the first variation pattern command, it is set from step S128 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310. Based on the determination result notification command, it is determined as one of the above 2R probability variation big hit symbol, 8R probability variation jackpot symbol, 10R probability variation jackpot symbol, 8R normal jackpot symbol, small hit symbol, and off symbol, and the second variation pattern command is received. If so, based on the determination result notification command transmitted from the main control MPU that is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process and is mounted on the main control board 1310, the 2R probability variation big hit symbol, 4R probability variation Big hit design, 5R certainty variation big hit design, 6R certainty variation big hit design, 7R certainty variation big hit design, 8R certainty variation big hit design, 16R certainty variation big hit design, 2R normal big jackpot design, it is decided to one of the outlier design.

When the variation display result of the received variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) is off, the received variation pattern command reaches (in this case, the left decorative design and the right When it shows that the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the same design, and the middle decorative design is still stopped), the left decorative design and the right decorative design are the same design as the removed design, Only the middle decorative design is determined as a combination of designs different from the left decorative design and the right decorative design (out-of-reach design).

When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the notice flag indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed is set by the notice determination process described above (step S803), If the notice flag is not set, the process data corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected (step S806), and the display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the selected process data (step S807).

On the other hand, if the notice flag indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed is set in step S803, the number of times to be executed this time among a plurality of times (three times in this example) of variable display for executing the particular notice effect The process data corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received is selected from among the plurality of types of process data corresponding to (step S804), and the value of the advance notice counter is decremented by 1 (step S805). Display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the process data (step S807). The notice counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of times of variable display for executing the specific notice effect, and is set according to the determined number of executions of the specified notice effect when it is determined that the notice effect is executed. It is like this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least when the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) starts a variable display that does not accompany the reach, in other words, at least the special lottery result ( 1st special lottery result, 2nd special lottery result) If the start condition of the variable display that is out of reach is not satisfied, the start condition of the variable display other than the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is satisfied. Depending on the number of variable displays that have not been performed, that is, the number of pending calls, hold shortening control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the variable displays as compared to the normal time. Specifically, in this example, the deviation variation pattern of variation time "13 seconds", the deviation variation pattern of variation time "8 seconds", and the variation time "4 seconds" are defined as the variation patterns of the variation without reach. With the deviation variation pattern, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 holds the first special symbol when the condition for starting the variation display in which the first special lottery result is the deviation without reach is satisfied. If the number is "1" or "2", in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82), the fluctuation time pattern of "13 seconds" is determined as a deviation fluctuation pattern, and the number of first special symbols reserved is "3". If there is a fluctuation time of "8 seconds", the deviation fluctuation pattern is determined, and if the number of reserved first special symbols is "4", a fluctuation time of "4 seconds" is determined as a deviation fluctuation pattern. In addition, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 has a second special symbol holding number of "1" or "when the start condition of the variable display that the second special lottery result is out of reach is not satisfied. If it is 2", it is determined as a deviation variation pattern of variation time "13 seconds" in the second variation pattern setting process not shown, and if the number of second special symbols held is "3", variation time of "8 seconds" is lost. The variation pattern is determined, and if the number of holding of the second special symbol is "4", the variation time pattern is determined to be a deviation variation pattern of "4 seconds".

In addition, as described above, in each of the plurality of variable display of the decorative pattern for performing the specific notice effect, instead of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern is reduced to an end portion (for example, an upper left end portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600). ) May be displayed)) After displaying a part of a series of stories (one time of a series of stories that are executed in three times), the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is displayed. Therefore, when the period of the story displayed in one variable display among a plurality of variable displays of a decorative pattern that executes a series of stories as a specific notice effect is fixed, the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed and 1 It is not possible to display the entire story because the variation time is shorter than the period of the story displayed in the variable display once, or the period of the story displayed in the single variable display is shortened and the above hold shortening control is performed. Even if it is executed, the variation time will not be shorter than the period of the story displayed in the variable display once, so that the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is displayed after the story displayed in the variable display is displayed once. There is a problem that a useless period occurs until the player is bored and the player is bored.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for each of a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative pattern for executing a series of stories as a specific notice effect, a single variable display is displayed so as to correspond to the above-mentioned hold shortening control. It has multiple types of process data with different story periods. That is, the variation time “8 seconds” as the story displayed in the first variation display of the number of notices among the multiple variations (three times in this example) of the variation display of the decorative pattern for executing the series of stories as the specific announcement production. The process data corresponding to "4 seconds" and the process data corresponding to "4 seconds" are provided, and the process time corresponding to the fluctuation time "13 seconds" and "8 seconds" are displayed as the story displayed in the second fluctuation display of the number of notices. Process data corresponding to “4 seconds” and process data corresponding to a fluctuation time “13 seconds” and a process corresponding to “8 seconds” as a story displayed in the third fluctuation display of the number of notices It has data and process data corresponding to “4 seconds”. In step S804, the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is selected from the process data corresponding to the number of notices. In the example described above, the number of holdings is always 3 or more when the first changing display of the plurality of changing displays of the specific notice effect is started, and the holding shortening control is executed to “4 seconds”, Alternatively, although only the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of “8 seconds” is shown, the first fluctuation display of “4 seconds” and “8 seconds” among the plural fluctuation displays of the specific notice effect is shown. Not only the process data corresponding to one fluctuation time, but also the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of "13 seconds" may be provided. That is, when the specific notice effect can be executed even when the number of holdings is 3 or less in step S304 of the notice determination process, the first change display of the plurality of change display of the notice notice effect is performed. In some cases, the number of holding times becomes less than 2 when the start is started and the holding time reduction control is not executed, and the fluctuation time of "13 seconds" is determined. It is also possible to select the process data corresponding to the variable display and execute the first variable display of the multiple variable display of the specific notice effect, or to start the variable display other than the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied. When the variation shortening control is executed only when the number of variable displays that are not satisfied is “4”, when the first variable display of the multiple variable displays of the specific notice effect is started. Since the number of holdings is 3 or less, the hold time reduction control may not be executed and a variable time of "13 seconds" may be determined. In this case, select the process data corresponding to the variable time of "13 seconds". Then, the first variable display among the multiple variable display of the specific notice effect may be executed.

It should be noted that although a plurality of types of process data corresponding to the same number of notices is configured to display the same story, the contents of the effect (video and explanation) can be simplified according to the period of the variable time, and By changing the details, the variation time and the production period are matched. Also, not only when the process data corresponding to the same fluctuation time is selected with consecutive notice times, but also when the process data corresponding to different fluctuation times are selected, each story is smoothly connected and the game is played. Each process data is configured so that the person does not feel uncomfortable. This allows a series of stories to be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU discards the advance determination information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage areas for storing the advance determination information in step S302 of the advance notice determination processing, which corresponds to the received variation pattern command. Stored in the reserved storage area by moving the pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N=2-4) storage area to the (N-1)-th (N=2-4) storage area. The prior determination information is shifted (step S808). That is, if the first variation pattern command is received, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area is discarded, and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is stored. The stored pre-determination information is moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area, and if the second variation pattern command is received, the first storage area of the second reserved storage area The pre-determination information stored in is deleted and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area. Let

Then, the peripheral control MPU ends this process at the time when the above-described production control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variation production process (step S712) (step S813).

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned variation effect ending process (step S713). When the effect control process flag indicates that the variable effect end process is to be performed, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 causes the variable effect start process (step S711) as shown in FIG. The stop symbol determined in step S802 is confirmed and displayed (a state in which all left, middle, and right decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed) (step S851).

Next, if the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a jackpot start command notifying that the jackpot game is started from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S852), When the above-mentioned production control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the big hit production process (step S714) (step S853), this process ends.

Moreover, if the small hit start command for notifying that the small hit game is started is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S854), the process shifts to the small hit effect process (step S715). When the effect control process flag is updated as described above (step S855), this process ends.

If neither the big hit start command nor the small hit start command has been received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (NO in step S854), the advance notice flag is set (step S856) Whether or not the notice counter is "0", that is, whether or not all of the plurality of (three times in this example) variable display for executing the specific notice effect have been executed (the remaining number of the specific notice effect is "0"). (Step S857), after resetting the notice flag (step S858) if all the multiple (three times in this example) variable displays for executing the specific notice effect are executed (step S858), When the above-mentioned production control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variation production start processing (step S711) (step S859), this processing ends.

[10. Specific notice production summary]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device corresponds to the variable display of a series of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) a plurality of times (three times in this example) as a series of stories as the special notice effect. The decorative pattern is executed in 1600 by dividing it into a plurality of times (three times in this example) of variable display. However, the period for executing the series of stories as the specific notice production is not constant, and may be changed (shortened) by the above-mentioned hold shortening control. In the present embodiment, even if the period for executing the series of stories as the specific notice production is changed (shortened) by the hold shortening control, the series of stories can be completed within the changed period. It is like this. That is, the same story can be displayed in each of a plurality of variable times (4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13 seconds) so as to correspond to the above-mentioned hold shortening control with the same number of times of notice in the series of stories executed as the specific notice production. The process data is configured in, and the variation time and the production time are matched by simplifying the effect contents or making the details more detailed according to the period of the variable time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163, when the number of notices is the third time (in this example, the last variation display of the specific notice effect), when the number of holdings for which the variation time is 4 seconds is one or two, While the explanation that "experts attack such A" is displayed as text on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when the number of holdings that changes the time to 13 seconds is four, "give talent. The description "who is the attacker at A" will be displayed as text on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the detailed description will be given because the variation time is long. Further, in addition to such a description using characters, when the number of holdings with a fluctuation time of 13 seconds is 4 more than the number of holdings with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is 1 or 2 The video is displayed. In this way, the longer the variation time, the more detailed the contents of the effect, so that the player can obtain more information. In addition, the explanation has been made that the effect content becomes more detailed as the change time is longer, but depending on the effect that this change time becomes longer, the degree of expectation for the hold that caused execution of the specific notice effect is suggested. May be performed. For example, by preparing a plurality of character colors (for example, white, blue, and red) of “flowering talent” in FIG. 163, it is possible to look at the specific notice effect itself with expectation.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the first special symbol. Therefore, when the specific advance notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the starting prize for the first starting opening 2002, when the starting winning for the second starting opening 2004 occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol starts. As a result, it is not possible to match the period of the story executed with one variable display among the multiple variable displays of the decorative pattern executed as the special announcement effect and the variation time, or as the special announcement effect. There is a possibility that the variable display that causes the execution of the specific notice effect cannot be executed as the variable display immediately after the series of stories is displayed over the multiple variable displays. Therefore, in this example, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning in the first start opening 2002, before the variable display according to the number of executions of the particular notice effect is executed. Also, when the start winning to the second start opening 2004 occurs, the specific notice effect is ended. Specifically, although not shown, when the advance notice flag is set in step S803 of the variation effect start process, the advance notice flag is set due to the start winning in the first start opening 2002. It is determined whether or not, the variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 when it is set due to the start winning to the first start opening 2002 relates to the second special symbol ( If it is a second variation pattern command), the advance notice flag is reset and the specific advance notice effect is terminated before executing the change display according to the number of executions determined by proceeding to step S806. On the other hand, in the case where the specific announcement effect based on the occurrence of the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed in step S803, the specific announcement based on the occurrence of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002 in step S803. Even when the effect is being executed, if the variation pattern command determined to be received in step S801 is related to the first special symbol (first variation pattern command), the specific notice effect is continued. Like this, the process proceeds to step S804.

In this way, the player is made uncomfortable by surely matching the period and the variation time of the story executed in one variable display among the multiple variable displays of the decorative pattern executed as the specific notice effect. In addition to suppressing the above, it is possible to execute the variable display that is the cause of executing the specific notification effect as the variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories as the specific notification effect over a plurality of variable displays. There is. It should be noted that, in the variable display based on the occurrence of the starting prize in the second starting opening 2004, the specific announcement effect is not executed, but only in the variation display based on the occurrence of the starting prize in the first starting opening 2002. May be performed. That is, if the advance determination command received in step S301 of the advance notice determination process is based on the occurrence of a start winning at the second start opening 2004, the process from step S302 to step S309, that is, the specific advance notice effect is executed. It is also possible to terminate the processing without executing the lottery processing to determine whether or not the specific advance notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second start opening 2004.

In addition, in the above-described example, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning in the first start opening 2002, it is before the variable display according to the number of executions of the particular notice effect is executed. Even though the specific notice effect is ended when the start winning for the second starting opening 2004 occurs, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the starting winning for the second starting opening 2004, for example. When the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted, and the specific notice effect is restarted based on the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the start winning in the second starting opening 2004. Good. Further, in this case, the fact that the specific notice effect is being interrupted is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like while the decorative symbol based on the winning a prize on the second starting opening 2004 is being displayed (“the notice effect is being suspended”). You may do so. Further, even if the specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is started, the second special based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 When the lottery result is a big hit, the specific announcement effect may be ended without being restarted.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a specific notice effect, a story that is completed in three episodes is executed such that one story is displayed for each variable display of the decorative pattern executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Since all the three episodes of the specific notice production are executed, the variable display to be executed next can be expected, so that the player pays attention to what story the story being executed is. .. Therefore, in this example, when the specific notice effect is being executed, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 is configured to display the story number being executed (for example, “third episode” or the like). ..

In the above-described embodiment, a series of stories is executed as a specific notice effect separately in a plurality of variable display of decorative symbols executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to a plurality of variable display of special symbols. However, a series of stories is displayed as a specific notice effect even in a plurality of variable display of decorative symbols (so-called pseudo continuous variation) executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to one variable display of the special symbol. The decorative pattern may be divided into a plurality of times of variable display and may be executed.

Further, in this example, in step S304 of the above-described advance notice determination process, the specific advance notice effect can be executed only when the number of holdings is "4" which is the maximum value of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, even if the number of holdings is not the maximum value, it may be possible to execute the specific notice production, and in this case, the number of executions of the specific notice production is determined to be a number not exceeding the number of holdings. May be. For example, when the winning number for the first starting opening 2002 occurs when the number of reserved first special symbols is “2”, the variable display based on the starting winning that has occurred this time is excluded as the number of times of execution of the specific announcement effect. The number may be determined so as not to exceed “times”. Further, the probability that it is determined to execute the specific announcement effect may be changed according to the number of holdings. For example, if the holding number is the maximum value, the specific announcement effect is executed more than when the holding number is not the maximum value. Then, the probability of being determined may be increased.

In addition, as described above, the series of stories as the specific notice presentation is executed over a plurality of variable displays that are out of reach. This variation display without reach is the variation pattern that is usually most frequently executed, and is one that the player cannot most expect for a big hit. In this example, by executing the specific notice effect over the variable display without reach, even if the variable display, which the player cannot expect most from the big hit, is performed, the expectation for the big hit is expected. Can be increased.

On the other hand, when the specific notice production is executed, the variable display in which the series of stories is executed is always missed, and in the variable display immediately after the series of stories is completed (the variation display that causes execution of the specific notice production). The chances of a big hit increase. That is, it is possible to make the player infer that the result of the variable display is out of place in the variable display of three times when the series of stories is executed as the specific notice production, and the variable display immediately after the series of stories is completed (specific While it is possible to expect a big hit to occur for the variable display that is executed immediately after the notice production is finished, it is possible to suppress excessive expectations for the occurrence of a big hit when the variable display is performed three times for executing a series of stories.

In addition, in the variable display immediately after the series of stories as the specific notice effect is executed (the variable display that causes the execution of the specific notice effect), effects related to the series of stories executed as the specific notice effect are executed. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display that is the cause of executing the specific notice production in association with the multiple variable displays for executing the specific notice production, and to execute the specific notice production from the start of execution of a series of stories. It is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the big hit by executing the related effects for a long time until the variable display.

The story to be executed in one variable display of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative pattern for executing the series of stories as the specific notice effect is changed depending on the number of holdings when the variable display is started. Therefore, in order to see all the stories that are different depending on the number of holdings, it is possible to add a new game property such as adjusting the hitting of the game ball aiming at the change of the number of holdings. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery for determining whether or not to make a jackpot is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning in the first starting opening 2002 and the starting winning in the second starting opening 2004. Yes, the more the number of occurrences of the starting winnings into the first starting opening 2002 and the starting winnings into the second starting opening 2004, the more advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such a game is executed, a more detailed story is displayed as a specific notice effect for the player whose advantage degree has decreased by stopping the driving of the game ball when the specific notice effect is executed. Since the privilege to do is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's emotions due to the decrease in the degree of advantage and gradually increase the expectation for the big hit.

[11. Hachirensho chance production]
Next, the eight-soujo chance production executed during the big hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second special lottery results are "4R certainty variation jackpot", "5R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", "7R certainty variation jackpot", "8R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot", "16R If the probability variation big hit 3", the combination of the same odd symbol among the odd symbols "1", "5", and "9" is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol by the stop symbol. From the stop symbol, the specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, the specification 3 5R probability variation big hit, the specification 4 6R probability variation big hit, the specification 5 7R probability variation big hit, the specification 6 8R probability variation big hit, the specification 8-3 16R probability variation big hit 3 whichever It is not possible to determine whether you have won.

And the second special lottery result is "4R certainty variation jackpot", "5R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", "7R certainty variation jackpot", "8R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot". When the big hit game based on the big hit game is started, a lottery chance opportunity effect that notifies the player of which big hit through the mahjong game is executed as the effect during the big hit game is executed. It should be noted that "Hachirenso" is a mahjong game in which if one person wins eight times in a row, this eighth win will be fulfilled. ) And is very difficult. Therefore, the player can infer that a special state will occur when the main character plays eight consecutive games in the mahjong game.

As shown in FIG. 164(A), the above-mentioned second special lottery result as a big hit symbol is "4R certainty variation jackpot", "5R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", "7R certainty variation jackpot", "8R certainty variation jackpot", When the "16R probability variation big hit 3" is commonly displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as a big hit pattern of the decorative pattern, the left, middle and right decorative patterns are all stopped and displayed at "5", and then the big hit game is started. In addition to notifying that it will be performed (FIG. 164(B)), it will also be notified that the eight-soujo chance presentation will be performed (FIG. 164(C)). In this example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays “Harenzo bonus achieved when 8 Renjo is achieved! Understand that bonuses will be awarded. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, regardless of whether it is a big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 or a big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006, it is a center character object in the big hitting game. Since a so-called right hitting game is performed, in which a game ball is hit to the right in the front view rather than the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of 2500, when the big hit game is started, "right hit →" is displayed in the upper right part of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By displaying, the player rotates the handle lever 504 to adjust the launch strength so that the right-handed game is performed.

In addition, in this example, the main character becomes a parent in the mahjong game, the eight-soujo chance production is started, and the main character finishes in each round of the big hit game, or a character other than the main character (for example, Sub-character) will be displayed, or it will be a flow station without anyone being displayed. Then, when the main character has won, the big hit game in which the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time is continued to start the next round, and the characters (sub-characters) other than the main character win. Or, if nobody finishes the game and it becomes a flow station, the jackpot game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time is finished. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the eight consecutive chance chance production while hoping to continue the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time. Since a big hit game of 4 or more rounds is always executed in the big hit that carries out the Harensho chance effect, the main character is always executed until the third round of the big hit game. In this way, since the main character always completes the effect until the third round, and the jackpot game is continued, the appearance frequency of the effect in which the main character finishes in the eight-runsou chance presentation and continues the jackpot game is high. It is possible to give a good impression to the player as to the Harensou chance production as it increases, and it is possible to improve the expectation for the continuation of the big hit game when the Harensou chance production is executed.

When the Harensho chance production is started, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character takes a mahjong tile in the mahjong game (FIG. 164(D)), and then the main character touches the hit tile. By displaying a mode in which the main character finishes, a notification that the jackpot game in which the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time will be continued, and a jackpot game in which the second large winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time will be given. The number of times of continuation (number of consecutive holidays) is notified (FIG. 164(F)). In this example, as shown in FIG. 164(F), similar to the mahjong game, by notifying the number of turf sticks as “one place”, the number of rounds of the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time (continuous) The number of villas) is notified. Further, in this example, the number of rounds being executed is displayed on the lower left part of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the number of lawn sticks corresponding to the number of consecutive games is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114. The lawn sticks displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 are increased and displayed every time the big hit game in which the second big winning hole 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time continues (every round of the big hit game continues). You can check the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the eight-story chance production.

In addition, when the big hit game of this time is executed based on the second special lottery result of "4R certainty variation big hit", the peripheral control MPU has the same effect as in FIGS. 164(D) to 164(F). After the display is executed in each round up to three rounds of the big hit game, when the fourth round of the big hit game is started, “3honba” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (FIG. 164(G)), and the main again. A mode in which the character takes Mahjong tiles in the Mahjong game is displayed (FIG. 164(H)). Then, after displaying a mode in which a character (sub-character) other than the main character has completed or has become a flow station without any completion (in the example of FIG. 164(I), no completion is completed). (The mode in which the game is played is displayed), the total number of points acquired by the main character in the mahjong game executed during the production of the Harensho chance is displayed (Fig. 164(J)), and the jackpot game is finished ( FIG. 164(K)).

On the other hand, when the big hit game this time is executed based on the second special lottery result of "16R probability variation big hit 3", the peripheral control MPU is the same as that of FIGS. 164(D) to 164(F). After performing the effect display in each round up to the seventh round of the big hit game, when the eighth round of the big hit game is started, "7honba" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (FIG. 165(A)), and again. A mode in which the main character takes Mahjong tiles in the Mahjong game is displayed (FIG. 165(B)). Then, a mode is displayed in which the main character finishes by hitting the tiles by the main character (FIG. 165(C)), and is executed during the achievement of the eight-story villa and the production of the eight-story villa chance. After displaying the total score of the main character in the mahjong game (FIG. 165(D)), the main jackpot game is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without ending the jackpot game and the jackpot game is continued ( FIG. 165(E)). As described above, in the ninth to 16th rounds of the big hit game executed during the full service bonus, the opening/closing pattern in which the game balls can enter is executed while the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time. .. In conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to prevent the player from realizing that the special winning opening is controlled to be opened and closed, the big winning opening is controlled to be opened and closed for a short time, and a normal left-handed game is performed. However, in the case of this example, since it is possible to obtain a prize ball by allowing the game ball to enter while controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a short time, the above-mentioned “right hitting” By continuing to display "→", the player is actively notified that a right-handed game will be played, and the player is encouraged to win a prize ball.

As described above, in this example, when the second special lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit 3", the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter by controlling the second special winning opening 2006 to open for a long time After executing 8 rounds, the opening/closing pattern in which the game balls can enter is executed 8 rounds while the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time. In addition, in each round until the main character performs the eight consecutive villa chance production and the main character performs the eight consecutive villa, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter is executed by controlling the second special winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time. It Then, after the main character achieves the eight consecutive games by performing the eight consecutive games chance production, the opening/closing pattern in which the game balls can enter while controlling the second special winning opening 2006 to be opened for a short time as a role full bonus. Is designed to run. As a result, when the main character achieves the eight consecutive games chance performance and the main character achieves the eight consecutive games chance, the winning bonus is executed after the eight consecutive games chance production, and the eight rounds executed during the eight consecutive games chance production. In addition to this, you will be able to win 8 more rounds. In addition, in the opening and closing pattern in which the game balls can enter while controlling the opening of the second prize hole 2006 which is executed with the usefulness bonus for a short time, a maximum of two game balls can be used as the second prize hole in one round. Can be entered in 2006. For this reason, when the winning bonus is executed, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter is executed for eight rounds by controlling the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time without executing the winning bonus. Compared to the case of finishing the big hit game, the player can obtain 240 more prize balls. In this way, the number of award balls that can be won in the big hit game changes according to the effect result of the eight-runsou chance performance. Therefore, when the eight-runsou chance performance is executed, pay attention to the performance result and use the full bonus. Can be expected to earn.

In this way, in the role-filling bonus executed when the main character achieves eight consecutive games by performing the eight consecutive ones chance production, the long-time opening control of the second special winning opening 2006 is not executed, but the short-time opening control is performed. Only executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that a new jackpot different from the eight rounds of the jackpot game has been given, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the winning bonus is executed.

In the example described above, when the main character achieves eight consecutive games by performing the eight consecutive ones chance production, the second special winning opening 2006 is set for a predetermined time (0. It was configured to execute the short-time open control once to open the game ball for 6 seconds), but after the main character achieves eight consecutive games, the player can further win the prize ball. The state of opening and closing (the opening time, the number of times of opening and closing, the opening and closing intervals, etc.) of the second special winning opening 2006 in the winning full bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the second special winning opening 2006 may be controlled to be opened a plurality of times for a short time in each of the ninth and subsequent rounds. The opening control may be performed only once at the time and interval at which (for example, five) game balls can be received.

In addition, in the above example, only when the result of the second special lottery is "16R probability variation big hit 3", the eight-character sou chance effect is executed, and the main character performs the effect of achieving the eight-soujo. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it becomes another big hit that executes the 16R big hit game, it is possible to execute the eight consecutive villa chance production, thereby executing the eight consecutive villa chance production. When the player achieves eight consecutive games, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened/closed by any one of the opening/closing patterns having a different number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player as a winning bonus. May be. In addition, in the case of being able to execute the eight-runsou chance production in the case of a plurality of big hits in which the number of times that the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time is different in each of the nine rounds and thereafter, the eight-runs are performed. When creating a chance and when starting the role-filling bonus (during the interval from the end of the eighth round to the start of the ninth round), the number of times the second major winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time in each round during the role-filling bonus is suggested. You may make it perform an effect. In this case, the number of prize balls that the player can obtain increases as the number of times the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time in each round of the winning bonus is increased. You can improve the enjoyment of the game by paying attention to the production.

Further, the effect contents of the eight consecutive villa chance production may be changed according to the second special lottery result, for example, the total score in the mahjong game in the eight consecutive villa chance production is not less than a predetermined score. If so, an opening/closing pattern may be executed in which the number of prize balls that the player can obtain is larger than that in the case of less than this score. Specifically, even when the second special lottery result is the above "16R probability variation jackpot", the second special lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot 1 If the result is “8 Rensou chance production”, the mahjong game will be executed so that the main character will get 100,000 points or more by the 8th round of the big hit game. The two major winning openings 2006 are opened for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example), or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received in the second major winning opening 2006. After the game ball is opened until the game ball is received, the opening/closing pattern for closing the second special winning opening 2006 for a predetermined time (1.0 second in this example) is 8 times. While performing (over the remaining 8 rounds), if the second special lottery result is "16R probability change jackpot 3", execute the 8 Rensou chance production and win the main character by the 8th round of the jackpot game. After executing the mahjong game so that the score is less than 100,000, it is possible to receive the game ball as the normal combination full bonus through the second special winning opening 2006 for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example). By opening and closing the open and closed pattern for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example), the game ball is closed 8 times (for the remaining 8 rounds). If the chance production is executed and the number of points acquired by the main character is 100,000 or more, an opening/closing pattern is executed in which the number of prize balls that the player can obtain as a fulfillment bonus is larger than when the number of points is less than 100,000. You may do it.

In addition, in the above-described example, the special round of the big hit game can be executed as a winning bonus only when the main character performs the eight consecutive games chance production (after eight rounds are executed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round is also executed when the eight-story chance production is completed without the main character performing eight-story production (when the eight-series chance production is completed in less than eight rounds). You may get it. In this case, the second major winning opening 2006 is set so that the player can obtain a smaller number of prize balls than the role-filling bonus executed after the main character executes the eight-story chance production. It may be controlled to open and close. For example, when the second special lottery result is the “4R probability variation big hit”, the eight consecutive villa chance production is executed and the second big winning opening 2006 is held for a predetermined time until four rounds ( It is opened for 29 seconds in this example) or an open state in which the game balls can be received until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received in the second special winning opening 2006. After setting the state, the opening and closing pattern is executed in which the second winning hole 2006 is closed for a predetermined time (1.0 second in this example) so that the game ball cannot be received. After the character cannot finish the match and the eight-soujo chance production is completed, the second special winning opening 2006 is set to an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds), and then predetermined. By executing the opening/closing pattern that makes the game ball into the unacceptable closed state for four hours (for example, 1.0 seconds) four times (for the remaining four rounds), the eight-story chance production is performed and the main character is executed. Even if it is possible to execute a special round that allows a maximum of one game ball to be entered per round when the eight consecutive games chance production ends in less than eight rounds without playing eight consecutive games Good.

In addition, as described above, when the second special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 3”, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be open for a long time until the 8th round is executed, and thus the maximum per one round is achieved. With 10 game balls can be entered into the second prize hole 2006, and after 9 rounds, the second prize hole 2006 can be controlled to be opened for a short time so that a maximum of 2 game balls per round can be achieved. The player can enter the two major winning openings 2006. It should be noted that the short-time opening control of the second special winning opening 2006 executed in and after the ninth round is not performed in accordance with the timing at which the game ball is hit by the ball launching device 680, but is controlled at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the driving timing of the game balls is deviated, it becomes difficult to enter two game balls into the second big winning opening 2006 per round. On the other hand, after at least eight rounds of the big hit game are started (until the game balls accepted in the second special winning opening 2006 in 16 rounds are shot), the ball launching device 680 intermittently enters the second attacker passage 2543a. If you continue to hit the game ball to, it becomes possible to enter two game balls into the second prize hole 2006 with a very high probability (about 9 out of 10) There is. That is, if the result of the second special lottery is "16R probability variation big hit 3", after the 8th round of the big hit game is started, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily interrupted and the shooting is restarted at the start of the 9th round. Or, as compared with the case of launching a game ball with a launch strength that cannot be driven into the second attacker passage 2543a, at least 8 rounds of the big hit game are started (a game ball accepted in the second big winning opening 2006 in 16 rounds). Also, the advantage degree is higher when the game balls are continuously driven into the second attacker passage 2543a (the number of prize balls is increased). In this way, since the advantage degree becomes high when the game ball is continuously driven into the second attacker passage 2543a, the player fairly receives the prize ball without being influenced by the skill (skill level) of the player. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of suppressing a decrease in the operating rate from the gaming shop side.

Also, in the mahjong game executed in each round of the above-mentioned Harensho chance production, when the main character finishes, it is configured to continue the jackpot game until the next round without ending the jackpot game. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a plurality of types of winning modes in which the number of rounds with which the big hit game is surely continued when the main character has won is completed. For example, depending on the result of the second special lottery, the winning mode indicating that the player can continue to the next round (for example, up to 4 rounds if this is 3 rounds) and the next round (for example, if this round is 3 rounds) Either one of the winning mode indicating that the game can be continued up to 5 rounds) may be executed by lottery or the like. As a result, it is possible to bring attention to the effect result of the Harensho chance effect and make the player happy.

In addition, as described above, since the big hit game for executing the Harensho chance production always performs four or more rounds of big hit games, the main character must be completed until the third round in the mahjong game in the Harensho chance production. The big hit game is continued. In this way, in the round where the big hit game always continues regardless of the type of big hit, as a result of the production of the eight consecutive villa chances, the big hit game always continues regardless of the kind of big hit. It continues until the upper limit round (4 rounds in this example) You may make it display the effect result which shows that it does. As a result, at least until the round in which the big hit game continues is executed regardless of the kind of big hit, the eight-runsou chance production can be viewed with peace of mind. Also, until the upper limit round (4 rounds in this example) where the big hit game always continues, without performing the effect of whether or not the big hit game continues for each round, the upper limit round where the big hit game always continues (this By executing a series of effects over four rounds in the example), the effect of whether or not to continue to the next round from the upper limit round in which the big hit game is always continued may be executed.

[12. Various information output to external terminal board]
Next, the information output to the external terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a table showing information signals output from the external terminal board of the pachinko machine 1 to the hall management computer in accordance with the game situation.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the external terminal board is output to the hall management computer via various information signals according to the game situation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, the pachinko machine 1 of this example outputs eight signals to the hall management computer via an external terminal board in accordance with the gaming state.

1. 1. Special symbol display information output signal indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has ended (stopped) 2. A starting opening winning information output signal indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Big hit information output signal indicating that big hit is occurring 4. 4. A hit information output signal indicating that a big hit or a small hit is occurring. A specific jackpot out of a plurality of types of jackpots (the probability of winning the prize ball is high (the probability of a game ball winning the prize hole (first prize hole 2005, second prize hole 2006) is high, or the prize hole is high) (Easy entry of game balls to the first prize hole 2005 and second prize hole 2006, or easy acquisition of prize balls) Big hit: In this example, 4R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit, 6R probability change Specific jackpot information output signal indicating that big hit, 7R sure change big hit, 8R sure change big hit, 10R sure change big hit, 16R sure change big hit 1, 16R sure change big hit 2, 16R sure change big hit 3, 8R regular big hit) Information output signal during time saving fluctuation indicating that time saving control is being executed 7. Every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as a prize ball reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal for notifying that. Misconduct (The magnetic detection sensor detects the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the special winning opening sensor (the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557) ) Has detected an abnormal ball entry of the game ball (ball entry that has occurred in a state where a big hit game or a small hit game is not being executed), a starting opening sensor (first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening 2004) ) Has detected an abnormal ball entry into the game ball (a number of balls that exceeds the expected number of balls entered), the second starting opening sensor 2551 has an abnormal entry into the gaming ball (second starting opening door member 2549). Detected that a certain amount of time has elapsed after the opening and closing of the vehicle was driven, and that the RAM clear switch was operated to completely erase the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. ) Security information output signal

The signal output from the external terminal board described above is transmitted to a hall management computer installed in a game hall (not shown). The hall management computer monitors a player's game and the like, and pachinko machines. Display the number of big hits on the data display installed above the pachinko machine 1 on the gaming island where 1 is installed, and the number of changes in special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed until the big hit. To do In this way, the data display displays information relating to the profit of the player, and plays an important role in determining the pachinko machine 1 to play from among the plurality of pachinko machines 1.

The special symbol display information output signal is that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is terminated (stopped) on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator as described above. In the present embodiment, at the end (stop) of the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device, specifically, the first special symbol stop process (step S84) ) In the second special symbol stop process (not shown) of the information output process (step S18) and the second special symbol process process (step S39) executed immediately after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. The information is output in the information output process (step S18) executed immediately after the stop display. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the computer for hole management, the computer for hall management changes the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the display has ended (stopped) and to count the number of times to grasp the total number of fluctuations in the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device in the pachinko machine 1. it can.

As described above, the starting opening winning information output signal is a signal for notifying that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, as described above in the switch processing (step S12). It is adapted to be output in the information output process (step S18) executed immediately after the one start opening sensor 2104 or the second start opening 2004 detects the entry of the game ball. When the starting mouth winning information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the hall managing computer, the hall managing computer causes the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting to be performed every time the starting mouth winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the mouth 2004, and count the number of times the start mouth winning information output signal is input to the first start mouth 2002 or the second start mouth 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

As described above, the jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that the jackpot has occurred (in the jackpot game), and the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) According to the first special symbol stop process (step S84) and the second special symbol process process (step S39) second special symbol stop process (not shown) after the big hit execution flag is set big hit control process (step S40) In ), the jackpot execution flag is continuously output until the jackpot execution flag is reset. When the jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the hall management computer, the hall management computer recognizes that the jackpot game is being executed while the jackpot information output signal is input. In addition, the number of times the jackpot information output signal is input can be counted to grasp the total number of jackpot occurrences in the pachinko machine 1.

As described above, the hit information output signal is a signal that conveys a state where a big hit is occurring (a big hit game) or a small hit is occurring (a small hit game). , Special special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) according to the first special symbol stop process (step S84) and the second special symbol process process (step S39) second special symbol stop process (illustrated Not) until the big hit execution flag is set in the big hit control process (step S40) until the big hit execution flag is reset with the end of the big hit game, or the first special symbol stop process (step S84) or the second The small hitting execution flag is set in the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) of the special symbol process processing (step S39), and the small hitting execution is executed with the end of the small hitting game in the small hitting control processing (step S41). Until the middle flag is reset, it is continuously output in either case. When the hit information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the hole management computer, the hole management computer is in a state where the big hit game is being executed or the small hit game is being executed while the hit information output signal is being input. It is possible to understand that the hit game is being executed, and to count the number of times the hit information output signal is input to ascertain the total number of big hits and small hits in the pachinko machine 1. You can

As described above, the specific jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a particular jackpot among a plurality of types of jackpots is occurring (a jackpot game related to the jackpot), and a special lottery result ( The first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) according to the first special symbol stop process (step S84) and the second special symbol process process (step S39) second special symbol stop process (not shown) Big hit (probability of winning a prize ball is high (the probability of winning a game ball at the special winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) is high, or the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, Easy entry of game balls into the 2nd prize hole 2006) or easy acquisition of prize balls) Big hit: In this example, 4R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 7R probability change big hit, 8R probability change Big hit 10R sure change big hit, 16R sure change big hit 1, 16R sure change big hit 2, 16R sure change big hit 3, 8R normal big hit) At (step S40), the jackpot execution flag is continuously output along with the termination of the jackpot game. When the specific jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the hall management computer, the hall management computer is executing the jackpot game regarding the specific jackpot while the specific jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the state is in a state and to count the number of times the specific jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of occurrences of the particular jackpot in the pachinko machine 1.

As mentioned above, the information output signal during the time saving fluctuation is a signal to inform that the time saving control is being executed, and the time saving is started from the time when the big hit game is ended and the time saving control is started in the big hit control process (step S40). It is designed to be continuously output until the control ends. When the time-shortening fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the hall management computer, the hall management computer can recognize that the time-shortening control is being executed, and also the time-shortening fluctuation information output signal. The total number of times of time saving control in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times of inputting.

As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. The number of balls of the game balls actually paid out as a ball is counted by the payout control MPU, and is output every time the number of balls reaches 10. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the hall management computer, the hall management computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to win the prize each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to understand that 10 game balls have been paid out as prize balls as balls, and the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out in the pachinko machine 1 can be calculated by counting the number of game balls paid out. You can figure it out.

The above-mentioned security information output signal is a signal for notifying that an illegal act has been detected as described above, and when the magnetic detection sensor detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a in the switch processing (step S12), , The special winning opening sensor (the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower big winning opening sensor 2557) is an abnormal entry of the game ball (the big hit game or the small hit game is executed. If a start-up sensor (first start-up opening sensor 2104, second start-up opening 2004) is detected when an incoming ball or the like that has not occurred is detected, the abnormal entry of the game ball (the number exceeding the expected number of incoming balls) Second entrance sensor 2551 detects an abnormal entrance of a game ball (a ball that occurs after a certain period of time has elapsed since the second opening door member 2549 was opened and closed). When the RAM clear switch is operated and the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU is completely erased, it is output in the initialization process of step S1. ing. When the security information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the computer for hole management, the computer for hole management can recognize that a fraudulent act has been performed or that the pachinko machine 1 has been reset.

Among the above-mentioned signals, a signal relating to a hit (big hit, small hit), specifically, a big hit information output signal, a hit information output signal, and a specific big hit information output signal may be output at the same time. Specifically, there is a high probability that the award ball will be obtained (the probability that the game ball will be won at the special winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006), or the big winning opening (first Big prize hole 2005, second big prize hole 2006) easy to enter game balls or easy to win prize balls) Big hit (in this example, 4R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 7R Probability change big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit 1, 16R probability variation big hit 2, 16R probability variation big hit 3, 8R probability variation big hit, 8R normal big hit) When big hit information output signal and hit information output signal and specific jackpot information output All of the signals are output at the same time, and the probability of winning the prize ball is low (the probability that the game ball wins the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) is low, or the big winning opening ( It was a big hit (difficult to hit a game ball to the first big prize hole 2005, second big prize hole 2006) or difficult to win a prize ball (in this example, 2R probability big hit, 2R normal big hit) In the case, the big hit information output signal and the hit information output signal are simultaneously output, while the specific big hit information output signal is not output, and in the case of the small hit, the hit information output signal is output, while the big hit information output The signal and the specific jackpot information output signal are not output. In this way, the hall management computer specifies whether the jackpot is a big hit or a small hit according to the combination of the received signal among the big hit information output signal, the hit information output signal, and the specific big hit information output signal, and the big hit Type (the probability of winning the prize ball is high (the probability of the game ball winning the prize hole (first prize hole 2005, second prize hole 2006) is high, or the prize hole (first prize hole 2005 , It is easy to enter a game ball into the second prize hole 2006), or it is easy to obtain the prize ball) The probability of winning the prize ball is low (the prize hole (first prize hole 2005) , The probability that a game ball will win the second prize hole 2006) is low, or it is difficult to enter the game ball into the prize hole (first prize hole 2005, second prize hole 2006) It is possible to specify if it is a big hit (difficult to get a ball).

Further, as described above, in this example, it is not possible to distinguish between the 2R certainty variation big hit, the 2R normal big hit and the small hit from the stop design of the decorative design which is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the first big winning opening. From the opening/closing mode of 2005, it is not possible to determine which of the 2R big hit game and the small hit game is being executed. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when either the 2R probability variation big hit, the 2R normal big hit or the small hit is generated, the hit information output signal is output to output the 2R probability variation big hit and the 2R probability hit. Usually, it is impossible to determine which of the big hit and the small hit has occurred.

On the other hand, the big hit information output signal is output when the 2R certainty variation big hit and the 2R normal big hit are generated, but is not output when the small hit is generated. In this way, it is possible to determine from the big hit information output signal whether it is a big hit (2R probability varying big hit, 2R normal big hit) or a small hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the hit information output signal is output to the hall management computer to determine the number of times of execution of the big hit alone, regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. In order to make it difficult, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the first big winning opening 2005 is a small hit or a big hit when the opening control is performed for a short time. Since it is difficult for the player to know that a big hit has not occurred, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game. Also, if the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game in the case of a big hit, it is understood that the probability improvement control will not be executed when the player recognizes that a small hit has occurred. Although there is a risk of degrading the game interest, it is possible to suppress the decline of the game interest by motivating the game by not letting the player know that it has not been a big hit.

In addition, the above-mentioned specific jackpot information output signal has a high probability of winning a prize ball (the probability that a game ball will win a prize hole (first prize hole 2005, second prize hole 2006) is high, or a prize hole ( It is easy to enter a game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 or to easily win a prize ball) (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit) , 7R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit 1, 16R probability variation big hit 2, 16R probability variation big hit 3, 8R normal variation big hit), but the probability of winning a prize ball is low (The probability of a game ball winning the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) is low, or to the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) It is not output when a hit (difficult to enter a game ball or a prize ball is difficult) (in this example, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, small hit) is generated. In this way, the probability of winning the prize ball is high from the specific jackpot information output signal (the probability that the game ball wins the prize hole (first prize hole 2005, second prize hole 2006) is high, or the prize is high). Possibility of winning a prize ball is low (probability of winning a prize ball) (whether it is easy to enter a game ball into the mouth (first prize hole 2005, second prize hole 2006) or easy to acquire a prize ball) The probability of a game ball winning the mouth (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) is low, or the game ball to the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) It is possible to determine whether it is a hard hit or hard to get a prize ball.

In the hall management computer, the information to be displayed on the above-mentioned data display can be appropriately set based on the input signal among the big hit information output signal, the hit information output signal and the specific big hit information output signal. For example, the number of times the big hit information output signal is input as information relating to the profit of the player displayed on the data display, that is, the total number of big hits is displayed, or the number of times the hit information output signal is input. That is, it is possible to display the total number of big hits and small hits, or the number of times the specific big hit information output signal is input, that is, the total number of particular big hits.

When the total number of big hits and small hits is displayed on the data display without displaying the total number of big hits, when a 2R certainty variation big hit, a 2R normal big hit, or a small hit occurs Also, since the total number of occurrences is added, it is not possible to determine from the information displayed on the data display whether a big hit (2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit) or a small hit has occurred. It becomes possible. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the high-probability control is being executed, so that it is possible to maintain the expectation that the high-probability control is being executed and improve the enjoyment of the game. Also, by displaying the total number of big hits and small hits, the player is made to feel as if he or she is hitting more jackpots than they actually are, and the probability of being a jackpot (in this example, about 395 minutes in a low probability state). It is possible to display the number of times more than the number of times calculated from the probability of 1 of 1), the probability of approximately 1/44 in a high probability state) on the data display, so that the pachinko machine 1 is attractive and motivates to play. be able to.

In addition, if the total number of big hits is not displayed on the data display, the probability of winning a prize ball is high (the first prize hole 2005, the second big winning opening 2006) is highly likely to be won by the game ball, or it is easy to put the game ball into the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006), or Since the number of times of big hits is displayed (the prize balls can be easily obtained), the game paid out in the big hit game according to the prize ball number information output signal input to the hall management computer during the input of the specific big hit information output signal. By displaying the number of balls (number of prize balls), the average number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out per jackpot can be shown more than it actually is, which allows the pachinko machine 1 You can enhance the appeal and motivate you to play. In this way, when the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened for a short time, the special big hit information output signal is not output so as to make it difficult to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Even if the player wins, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the player has not won the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Also, if the 2R certainty variation big hit, the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game, while if it is the small hit, the previous game state is continued, so it is a small hit when the probability improvement control is not performed. When the player knows that the probability improvement control will not be executed, it may reduce the interest of the game, but by not letting the player know that it was not a big hit It is possible to prevent the decline in the interest in playing games. In addition, since it is possible to output a specific jackpot information output signal so that it is difficult to determine that it is difficult to hit a game ball into the first jackpot opening 2005, it is possible to output a game to the first jackpot opening 2005. Even if the ball is controlled to be a big hit that is difficult, the fact that the entry of the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is not controlled to an easy big hit It is possible to prevent the player from grasping it, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. In addition, since it is difficult to enter the game balls into the first special winning opening 2005, it is difficult to determine the number of times of a big hit, in which the prize balls are hardly paid out, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are made. Since it is easy to enter the game balls into the game ball, it is possible to distinguish only the jackpots with a high probability that the game balls will be paid out. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game by motivating the game.

Note that the signal output from the external terminal board is not limited to the above-described one. For example, a signal indicating that the above-mentioned probability improvement control is being executed (probability fluctuation information output signal) is a big hit control process (step. In S40), the output may be continuously output from the time when the big hit game is ended and the probability improvement control is started until the probability improvement control is ended. In this case, when the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board is input to the hole management computer, the hole management computer can recognize that the probability improvement control is being executed. In addition, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal during the probability variation is input to grasp the total probability improvement control number in the pachinko machine 1. Further, in this case, the number of times of total probability improvement control or the number of big hits (number of times of consecutive hits) executed during the probability improvement control may be displayed on the data display. Accordingly, when the player starts a game, it is possible to determine the pachinko machine 1 to play from among the plurality of pachinko machines 1 by referring to various information.

In addition, in the case of a big hit, in addition to the signal corresponding to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) among the big hit information output signal, the hit information output signal and the specific big hit information output signal, The second special symbol stop process of the first special symbol stop process (step S84) and the second special symbol process process (step S39) with the round number information output signal indicating the number of rounds executed in the big hit game according to the lottery result ( (Not shown), the jackpot execution flag may be set to be output to the hall management computer via the external terminal board. When the number-of-rounds information output signal from the external terminal board is input to the computer for hall management, the computer for hall management can grasp the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game to be started and output the number of rounds information. By counting the number of times input for each round number indicated by the signal, it is possible to grasp the average of the number of rounds executed in the jackpot generated in the pachinko machine 1 and the ratio of each round number. Further, in this case, the data display may display the average number of rounds executed in the jackpot generated in the pachinko machine 1 or the ratio of each round number. Accordingly, when the player starts a game, it is possible to determine the pachinko machine 1 to play from among the plurality of pachinko machines 1 by referring to various information. When a combination of long-time open control and short-time open control is executed as a big hit game, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the round in which the short-time open control is executed is smaller than that in the round in which the long-time open control is executed. In such a case, the total of the number of rounds for which the long-time opening control is performed and the number of rounds for which the short-time opening control is performed is the number of rounds for the big hit, so that the data display unit displays the big hits generated by the pachinko machine 1. When displaying the average of the number of rounds executed and the ratio for each round, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is smaller than that for which long-time open control is executed in all rounds, but the player Since it cannot be distinguished, it is possible to make it appear as if a jackpot that is more advantageous than the actual one (a large jackpot that has a large number of rounds in which the opening control is executed for a longer time than the actual one) has occurred, which makes the pachinko machine 1 attractive. It can be raised to motivate the player to play.

In addition, in the present example, when a hit occurs, all the signals corresponding to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) among the big hit information output signal, the hit information output signal, and the specific big hit information output signal are output. It was configured to output to the hall management computer via the external terminal board, but if it is possible to identify which hit has occurred on the hall management computer side, a big hit information output signal and hit information output Only one of the signal and the specific jackpot information output signal may be output to the hall management computer. For example, the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) is a specific jackpot (the probability of winning the prize ball is high (the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) There is a high probability that the ball will win, or it is easy to enter a game ball into the special winning opening (first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006) or to win the prize ball. In the example above, 4R definite change big hit, 5R definite change big hit, 7R definite change big hit, 8R definite change big hit, 10R definite change big hit, 16R definite change big hit 1, 16R definite change big hit 2, 16R definite change big hit 3, 8R regular big hit) In the example, the jackpot information output signal, the hit information output signal, and the specific jackpot information output signal are all output to the hall management computer via the external terminal board, but only the specified jackpot information output signal is output to the external terminal board. You may make it output to a hall management computer via this, and even in this case, a hall management computer can specify that a specific big hit has occurred.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Is.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, in this case as well, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to be executed preferentially, and a maximum of eight variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are suspended are displayed in the order in which the suspension occurs. The present invention can be applied even to a game machine of a type (starting hold hold) that is started (in the order of occurrence of start winnings to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004).

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component member 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main liquid crystal display 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3100 Back movable operation unit 3110 Under back first decorative body (first decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3111 First decorative surface 3112 Second decorative surface 3114 Sub liquid crystal display device (effect display device, decorative member, decorative unit)
3115 1st hinge part 3120 2nd decorative body under the back (second decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3121 1st decoration surface 3122 2nd decoration surface 3124 2nd hinge part 3125 Decorative body support shaft (support shaft, decoration unit)
3126 2nd decorative body side operation gear (down shaft gear, decoration unit)
3127 bearing member 3130 rotary drive unit 3131 rotary drive unit base 3131a main part 3131b sub part 3131c upper bearing part 3131d lower bearing part 3132 rotation transmitting member 3132a sleeve part 3132b connecting part 3132c first decorative body side operating gear (axial gear)
3133 First drive gear (upper drive gear)
3134 Rear lower back first drive motor (upper drive motor, drive motor)
3136 Second drive gear (lower drive gear)
3137 Rear lower rear drive motor (lower drive motor, drive motor)
3142 unit cover 3143 rack member 3143a rack gear 3150 slide unit 3151 unit base 3152 slide guide 3153 transmission gear member 3154 drive gear 3155 back lower third drive motor 3157 slide cover

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying effects,
An acquisition means for acquiring the start information when the start condition is satisfied,
Start lottery means for performing a predetermined winning lottery on the basis of start information that a start condition is satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
When the winning lottery is performed by the starting lottery means and a special display result is derived and displayed on the display means when the winning lottery result is obtained, the winning lottery is performed by the starting lottery means and the winning lottery result is displayed. Display control means for deriving and displaying a non-special display result on the display means,
Of the starting information obtained by the obtaining means, storage means for storing starting information in which the start condition is not satisfied,
A value at which the start information is determined as the winning lottery result by the start time lottery means before the start time lottery means performs the winning lottery based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. A pre-determination unit that determines whether the display control is performed in any one of a plurality of variation modes, and
Only the winning start information, which is determined not to belong to the value determined to be the winning lottery result by the pre-determination means, and which is determined to be the normal failure mode without the reach mode, is stored in the storage unit. In a state in which the winning start information, which is determined to belong to the value determined as the winning lottery result by the pre-determination means, is stored, the starting information newly acquired by the acquisition means in the stored state , The specific notice production is executed by the notice execution means,
It is possible to shorten the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed in accordance with the number of times the starting information stored in the storage means is stored,
In the specific notice production, the first specific notice production executed when the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed is shortened in accordance with the stored number of the start information, and the period is shortened. There is a second specific notice effect that is executed when there is not,
Some of the first specified notice effects and the second specified notice effects are common, and the first specified notice effects are not displayed in the second specified notice effects. Is displayed in
When the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed is shortened, the time during which the first specific notice effect common to some of the second special notice effects executed is displayed is displayed. , than the time the second specific announcement attraction is displayed rather short,
A value at which the start information that triggers the execution of the first specified notice effect and the second specified notice effect in which the part of the effect forms are common is determined as the winning lottery result by the advance determination means. Expectation effect that makes the variation of the pattern that is determined to belong to is displayed the first specified notice effect and the second specified notice effect that are common to some of the effect modes. It is designed to be executed at a location different from the display means,
Among the plurality of starting openings that cause the acquisition of the starting information, the first specific preliminary announcement effect and the second specific effect in which the part of the effect modes are common only when a prize is won in the specific starting hole. A game machine characterized by enabling advance notice production.